JP6578038B1 - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of prompting a directing operation at a suitable timing without interrupting the flow of the game. In a slot machine capable of performing a chance button effect that prompts a player to operate a decision switch, from when a first stop operation is detected to ON until a third stop operation that is a final stop operation is detected to be ON. The chance button effect is not started during this period and during the period from when the bet number setting operation for setting the bet number is detected until the start operation is detected ON. [Selection] Figure 13

Description

  The present invention has a plurality of variable display columns for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and allows a variable display in each of the variable display columns to be started by setting a predetermined number of game values as the number of bets for one game. The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of giving a gaming value according to a symbol combination when the variable display row is stopped.

  As an example of a gaming machine, a plurality of reels on which a plurality of kinds of symbols are arranged are provided, and the start switch is operated to perform the lottery and start the rotation of the reels. There is a slot machine that can stop the rotation of the reels based on the pressing order, the operation timing, etc., and can give a privilege according to the combination of symbols on the winning line when all the reels stop. Further, as a state advantageous to the player, a bonus or RT (Replay Time) for improving a winning probability of a predetermined combination (for example, a small combination or replay) and a result of a combination lottery result in winning a plurality of combinations. There is also a slot machine provided with an AT (Assist Time) for notifying operation information that is advantageous to a player for winning a winning combination with a larger privilege. Also, there are pachinko machines that launch a pachinko ball into the game area and display a combination of symbols after variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols by winning at a start winning opening provided in the game area. Are known.

  In such a gaming machine, in order to improve the effect on the liquid crystal display or the like, after prompting the player to operate the effect button, the corresponding effect is executed according to the operation on the effect button. There was a thing (for example, refer to patent documents 1).

JP 2012-165936 A

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, an effect that prompts an operation to the effect button is executed when the first stop operation is performed after the reel rotates. In this way, after the first stop operation, an operation to the effect button different from the stop operation is prompted, and there is a possibility that the flow of the game is divided. Specifically, there is a possibility that it is difficult to perform the second stop operation with a good rhythm following the first stop operation due to the effect of prompting the operation to the effect button.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of prompting an operation for presentation at a suitable timing without interrupting the flow of the game.

A gaming machine according to an aspect of the present invention has a plurality of variable display columns that variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and sets a predetermined number of game values as the number of bets for one game, thereby variably displaying each of the variable display columns. A game operation detecting means for detecting a plurality of types of game operations in a gaming machine capable of giving a game value according to a symbol combination when all the variable display rows are stopped, and the game A game control means for controlling the progress of the game according to the game operation detected by the operation detection means, an effect operation detection means for detecting the effect operation, and an effect operation for the effect operation detection means. Effect control means for controlling execution of a plurality of types of effects including a promotion effect urging the player, the plurality of types of game operations include a bet number operation for setting a bet number, and the plurality of variable display columns A start operation for starting variable display, a first stop operation for stopping variable display in one variable display row in a state where all of the plurality of variable display rows are variably displayed, and the plurality of variable A final stop operation for stopping variable display in the one variable display column in a state where only one variable display column is variably displayed among the display columns, and the effect control means is configured to detect the start operation. The promotion effect in at least one of a first period from when the first stop operation is detected to a second period from when the final stop operation is detected until the bet number operation is detected A third period from when the betting number operation is detected until the start operation is detected, and the final stop after the first stop operation is detected. All SANYO not initiate the promotion effect in the fourth period until work is detected, the performance control unit, by the effect manipulation with the promotion effect is detected, advantageous to the player A identifiable effect that can specify whether or not a special privilege is given and a non-identifiable effect that cannot be specified whether or not the privilege is given. The operation-corresponding effect execution means is included, and the ratio at which the identifiable effect is executed by the operation-corresponding effect execution means is determined to be higher in the second period than in the first period. And
The ratio at which the unspecified performance is executed by the operation-corresponding effect execution means is determined to be higher in the first period than in the second period .

According to this configuration, the promotion effect is not started in the fourth period from when the first stop operation is detected to when the final stop operation is detected. For this reason, while the player performs the first stop operation, the promotion effect that prompts the player to perform the effect operation is not started while the subsequent stop operation is accepted. As a result, while the subsequent stop operation is accepted after the first stop operation is performed, the flow of the game is not divided, and the stop operation with a good rhythm following the first stop operation is obstructed. Can be prevented. In addition, the promotion effect is not started in the third period from when the betting number operation is detected until the start operation is detected. For this reason, while the player is performing the betting number operation, the start operation has not yet been performed and the execution of the game has not been confirmed, and the promotion effect that prompts the player for the operation for the effect may be started. Absent. As a result, for example, it is confirmed whether or not the promotion effect is executed by performing the betting number operation, and if the promotion effect is not executed, the set bet number is canceled and the game is not executed. Can be prevented. In addition, the unidentifiable effect is easily executed in the first period, and the identifiable effect is easily executed in the second period after the first period in the game flow. As a result, in the first period, it is easy to maintain the expectation that the privilege is granted and to maintain the expectation that the privilege is granted until the second period. it can. In addition, since the identifiable effect is easily executed in the second period, it is easy to specify whether or not the privilege is granted, and it is possible to clearly mark whether or not the privilege is granted. it can.
A gaming machine according to an aspect of the present invention has a plurality of variable display columns that variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and sets a predetermined number of game values as the number of bets for one game, thereby variably displaying each of the variable display columns. A game operation detecting means for detecting a plurality of types of game operations in a gaming machine capable of giving a game value according to a symbol combination when all the variable display rows are stopped, and the game A game control means for controlling the progress of the game according to the game operation detected by the operation detection means, an effect operation detection means for detecting the effect operation, and an effect operation for the effect operation detection means. Effect control means for controlling execution of a plurality of types of effects including a promotion effect urging the player, the plurality of types of game operations include a bet number operation for setting a bet number, and the plurality of variable display columns A start operation for starting variable display, a first stop operation for stopping variable display in one variable display row in a state where all of the plurality of variable display rows are variably displayed, and the plurality of variable A final stop operation for stopping variable display in the one variable display column in a state where only one variable display column is variably displayed among the display columns, and the effect control means is configured to detect the start operation. The promotion effect in at least one of a first period from when the first stop operation is detected to a second period from when the final stop operation is detected until the bet number operation is detected A third period from when the betting number operation is detected until the start operation is detected, and the final stop after the first stop operation is detected. In the fourth period until an operation is detected, the promotion effect is not started, and whether the promotion effect is given a privilege advantageous to the player by detecting the operation for the effect. A first pattern that executes an unidentifiable effect that cannot be specified, and an identifiable effect that can specify whether or not a privilege advantageous to the player is provided by detecting the operation for the effect And the rate at which the promotion effect by the first pattern is started in the first period is higher than the rate at which the promotion effect by the second pattern is started in the second period. It has been.
According to this configuration, the promotion effect is not started in the fourth period from when the first stop operation is detected to when the final stop operation is detected. For this reason, while the player performs the first stop operation, the promotion effect that prompts the player to perform the effect operation is not started while the subsequent stop operation is accepted. As a result, while the subsequent stop operation is accepted after the first stop operation is performed, the flow of the game is not divided, and the stop operation with a good rhythm following the first stop operation is obstructed. Can be prevented. In addition, the promotion effect is not started in the third period from when the betting number operation is detected until the start operation is detected. For this reason, while the player is performing the betting number operation, the start operation has not yet been performed and the execution of the game has not been confirmed, and the promotion effect that prompts the player for the operation for the effect may be started. Absent. As a result, for example, it is confirmed whether or not the promotion effect is executed by performing the betting number operation, and if the promotion effect is not executed, the set bet number is canceled and the game is not executed. Can be prevented. In addition, the rate at which the promotion effect by the first pattern is started in the first period is higher than the rate at which the promotion effect by the second pattern is started in the second period. For this reason, it is possible to provide many opportunities to increase the sense of expectation by starting the promotion effect by the first pattern in the first period, and to improve the interest of the game.
A gaming machine according to an aspect of the present invention has a plurality of variable display columns that variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and sets a predetermined number of game values as the number of bets for one game, thereby variably displaying each of the variable display columns. A game operation detecting means for detecting a plurality of types of game operations in a gaming machine capable of giving a game value according to a symbol combination when all the variable display rows are stopped, and the game A game control means for controlling the progress of the game according to the game operation detected by the operation detection means, an effect operation detection means for detecting the effect operation, and an effect operation for the effect operation detection means. Effect control means for controlling execution of a plurality of types of effects including a promotion effect urging the player, the plurality of types of game operations include a bet number operation for setting a bet number, and the plurality of variable display columns A start operation for starting variable display, a first stop operation for stopping variable display in one variable display row in a state where all of the plurality of variable display rows are variably displayed, and the plurality of variable A final stop operation for stopping variable display in the one variable display column in a state where only one variable display column is variably displayed among the display columns, and the effect control means is configured to detect the start operation. The promotion effect in at least one of a first period from when the first stop operation is detected to a second period from when the final stop operation is detected until the bet number operation is detected A third period from when the betting number operation is detected until the start operation is detected, and the final stop after the first stop operation is detected. The promotion effect is not started in the fourth period until a work is detected, and the effect control means executes the promotion effect in any of a plurality of types including a predetermined mode and a special mode. The promotion effect in the special mode starts at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period, and the promotion effect in the predetermined mode is the first period. Start at a higher rate than when the time is the second period.
According to this configuration, the promotion effect is not started in the fourth period from when the first stop operation is detected to when the final stop operation is detected. For this reason, while the player performs the first stop operation, the promotion effect that prompts the player to perform the effect operation is not started while the subsequent stop operation is accepted. As a result, while the subsequent stop operation is accepted after the first stop operation is performed, the flow of the game is not divided, and it is obstructed to perform the stop operation with a good rhythm following the first stop operation. Can be prevented. In addition, the promotion effect is not started in the third period from when the betting number operation is detected until the start operation is detected. For this reason, while the player is performing the betting number operation, the start operation has not yet been performed and the execution of the game has not been confirmed, and the promotion effect that prompts the player for the operation for the effect may be started. Absent. As a result, for example, it is confirmed whether or not the promotion effect is executed by performing the betting number operation, and if the promotion effect is not executed, the set bet number is canceled and the game is not executed. Can be prevented. Moreover, the expectation with respect to a promotion effect being performed in a special aspect in a 2nd period can be raised, and the interest of a game can be improved.

  Preferably, an image display unit capable of displaying a plurality of layers capable of displaying an image on a display area in an overlapping manner, wherein the effect control means executes a background effect according to the progress of the game, and the promotion effect and the The background effect is an effect executed by displaying each corresponding image on the image display unit, and the image corresponding to the promotion effect has a higher priority than the layer displaying the image corresponding to the background effect. Displayed in higher layers.

  According to this configuration, the image corresponding to the promotion effect can be displayed with priority over the image corresponding to the background effect. As a result, an image corresponding to the background effect in which an image corresponding to the promotion effect is embedded becomes unnecessary without increasing the processing load, and an image corresponding to the promotion effect can be displayed reliably.

  Preferably, the effect control means executes the promotion effect in any of a plurality of types including a predetermined mode and a special mode, and when a privilege advantageous for a player is granted than when the privilege is not given. The promotion effect is executed in the special mode at a high rate.

  According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the expectation that the promotion effect is executed in a special manner, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Preferably, the image display unit includes an image display unit capable of displaying a plurality of layers capable of displaying an image in a display area, and the effect control unit displays an image corresponding to the promotion effect on the image display unit. In the standby state in which the promotion effect is executed and the operation is not detected for a predetermined time, the display region is smaller than that in the standby state and is close to the edge of the display region. An image corresponding to the promotion effect is displayed, and a menu effect that allows the game history to be displayed in the display area is executed by detecting the effect operation with the promotion effect in the standby state.

  According to this configuration, when in the standby state, an image corresponding to the promotion effect can be displayed in a display area that is smaller and closer to the edge than when not in the standby state, and the menu effect is executed by detecting the effect operation. For this reason, in the standby state, it is possible to prevent the promotion effect from being executed in such a manner as to cause an excessive sense of expectation.

  Preferably, the effect control means can continuously execute the promotion effect started in at least one of the first period and the second period even after the period ends. The production operation detected during the promotion production is accepted effectively.

  According to this configuration, after the promotion effect is once started, the effect operation can be performed at the player's pace. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that would panic the player.

  Preferably, the presentation control means includes a first mode that does not suppress power consumption of the plurality of types of presentation means used for execution of the plurality of kinds of presentation effects, and a second mode that suppresses power consumption of the plurality of types of presentation means. The production operation detecting means detects an operation on a predetermined operation unit as the production operation, and the plurality of types of production means correspond to the predetermined operation unit. The effect control means includes the light effect means for irradiating light, and the effect control means has the same power consumption regardless of which of the plurality of modes is controlled during the promotion effect. Control means.

  According to this configuration, the light effect means is controlled with the same power consumption during the promotion effect, regardless of which mode is being controlled. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconveniences such as making it difficult for the player to notice that the promotion effect is being executed regardless of the controlled mode, and making it difficult to understand the target of the operation for the effect. it can.

It is a front view of a slot machine. It is a perspective view of the state where the front door of the slot machine is opened. It is a development view of a reel. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the slot machine. It is a figure for demonstrating game control processing. It is a figure for demonstrating a combination name, a symbol combination, etc. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating a winning combination group, a combination, etc. It is a figure for demonstrating each transition of a gaming state and an advantageous period. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the process in AT performed during AT among the advantageous period setting processes. It is a figure for demonstrating the addition lottery table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a cumulative number counter process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of an end determination process. It is a figure for demonstrating the timing which can start a chance button effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of a display of a liquid crystal display when a chance button effect is performed. It is a figure for demonstrating the table referred when drawing the pattern of a chance button effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of a display in a liquid crystal display when the continuous production of the pattern in which the chance button production is included is performed. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of a display in a liquid crystal display when the continuous production of the pattern in which the chance button production is included is performed. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the net increase number display process performed when the number of bets is set and one game is started. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the pure increase number display process performed when a medal is awarded. It is a figure for demonstrating the display mode of predetermined effects, such as the display mode of an OVER display number, and a pure increase number display. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the pure increase number display process in RBB. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the end screen process for displaying an end screen at the time of completion | finish of AT or a bonus. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of various data update processes. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the increase / decrease in the total number counter and net increase number in an advantageous period. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of a display when AT is complete | finished from the time ART is started until a net increase number reaches | attains "2000". FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a display example and a display example of an end screen when the net increase number reaches “2000” during AT since the start of ART. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a display example and a display example of an end screen when a net increase number reaches “2000” during a bonus controlled by winning an RBB during an AT after the start of ART. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a display example and a display example of an end screen when the net increase number reaches “2000” during display of the RBB confirmation screen during the AT after the ART is started. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining a display example and a display example of an end screen when the cumulative number reaches “2370” when the net increase is displayed in the normal mode after the ART is started. The display example when the cumulative number reaches “2370” and the display example of the end screen when the net increase in number is displayed in a rainbow manner since the ART is started are shown. It is a figure for demonstrating the portable interlocking | linkage setting screen displayed on a liquid crystal display in a player menu state, and the screen displayed on the display part of the communication terminal which a player owns. It is a figure for demonstrating the priority of the area | region used for a display among the display areas of a liquid crystal display, a layer, etc. about each of caution display and another image display. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the example of an effect regarding a caution display. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the example of an effect regarding a caution display. It is a figure for demonstrating the display content of the example of an effect in a liquid crystal display. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the addition related effect control process for controlling the effect in AT among effect control processes. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the example at the time of upper limit achievement undecided and upper limit achievement confirmed. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of a display when the background screen in AT is switched from the normal effect to the special background. It is a figure for demonstrating the control content at the time of the error generation in the display opportunity of each of an administrator menu screen and a player menu screen, an end opportunity, and menu display. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a player menu screen in a player menu state. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of a display of an effect customization screen. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process at the time of power activation. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating an error process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a setting change process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a sub control part process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a sub side setting change state process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a sub side game standby process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating an error alerting | reporting process. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of a display when the update display of a pure increase number is stopped by reaching | attaining an upper limit cumulative number. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the increase / decrease in the total number counter and net increase number in an advantageous period. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a special effect. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the pure increase number corresponding | compatible effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of an end screen. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the game screen in carrying out a mobile link. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of a display screen.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. As a specific example of the gaming machine according to the present invention, a slot machine capable of executing a game using a medal as a game medium will be described. However, the gaming machine is not limited to such a slot machine, and is not a gaming machine that can execute a game using a gaming ball as a gaming medium or a gaming medium (value of a tangible object such as a medal). It may be another gaming machine such as a gaming machine capable of playing a game using the score (value of an intangible object such as information recorded by an electromagnetic method).

<Example of slot machine configuration>
The overall configuration of the slot machine will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the slot machine. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front door of the slot machine is opened.

  The slot machine 1 is composed of a member including a box-shaped housing 3 having an opening on the front surface and a front door 5 attached to one side of the housing 3 so as to be freely opened and closed. The front surface of the housing 3 is closed by closing the front door 5 with respect to the housing 3. The front door 5 can be locked / released with respect to the housing 3 by a door key managed by an administrator of the game hall. Whether the front door 5 is closed with respect to the housing 3 is detected by the door sensor 20.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a display window 7 is provided in the central portion of the front door 5. From the display window 7, reels 11L, 11M, and 11R (hereinafter collectively referred to as reels 11L to 11R) on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged can be visually recognized. When the reels 11L to 11R are rotated, the display window 7 can visually recognize a state in which symbols arranged on the reels 11L to 11R are variably displayed. Thus, the variable display part 13 which variably displays a plurality of symbols is formed by the display window 7 and the reels 11L to 11R.

  The variable display unit 13 includes a plurality of variable display columns 10. Specifically, the variable display section 13 includes a left variable display row 10L composed of a portion corresponding to the front of the reel 11L and the reel 11L in the display window 7, and a portion corresponding to the front of the reel 11M in the display window 7. And a reel 11M, a middle variable display row 10M, and a right variable display row 10R comprising a portion of the display window 7 corresponding to the front of the reel 11R and the reel 11R. In the state where the reels 11L to 11R are stopped, the left variable display column 10L, the middle variable display column 10M, and the right variable display column 10R can stop and display symbols on the upper, middle, and lower stages, respectively. For this reason, nine symbols can be visually recognized from the display window 7.

  In the present embodiment, a so-called lower line composed of a lower row of the left variable display row 10L, a lower row of the middle variable display row 10M, and a lower row of the right variable display row 10R is set as a winning line to be a winning determination target for the combination. Yes. In the display window 7, a winning line NL is drawn.

  A liquid crystal display 27 is provided above the display window 7 of the front door 5. The liquid crystal display 27 executes an effect by displaying a predetermined image as the game (game) progresses. In addition, an explanation panel 29 on which a predetermined combination of symbols, the number of payouts, etc. is printed is provided above the liquid crystal display 27 of the front door 5. Lamp portions 33L, 33M, and 33R are provided. The lamp units 33L, 33M, and 33R include light sources such as LEDs, and perform effects by emitting light according to the progress of the game.

  On the left side of the display window 7 of the front door 5, a credit display 45, a payout display 46, a notification display 60, and an advantageous period notification lamp 80 are arranged. The credit indicator 45 displays a credit that is the number of medals stored (stored) in the slot machine 1 among medals owned by the player. The upper limit number of credits is set to 50.

  The payout display 46 is a display that is used for displaying various information such as error information and setting suggestion information as well as displaying the number of medals (game media) to be paid out when a winning combination of a combination occurs. The setting suggestion information is information that makes it possible to specify at least one of the setting values 1 to 6 and that indicates the set setting value. The notification display 60 is a display for notifying predetermined information for specifying an operation mode (for example, operation timing, pressing order, etc., hereinafter also referred to as an advantageous operation mode) advantageous for the player, a result of a role lottery, or the like. It is a vessel. The advantageous period notification lamp 80 is a display for notifying that an advantageous period in which an AT game that can notify the advantageous operation mode is acceptable (hereinafter referred to as an advantageous period).

  Each of the credit display 45, the payout display 46, and the notification display 60 is configured by, for example, a 7-segment LED, and notifies information according to the lighting state of each segment. Further, the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is constituted by, for example, an LED, and is turned on during the advantageous period and is turned off during a normal period that is not the advantageous period.

  Various operation units are provided below the display window 7 of the front door 5. As operation units, a bet switch 15, a maximum bet switch 17, a production operation unit 81, a start switch 19, a checkout switch 23, stop switches 21L, 21M, and 21R (hereinafter also collectively referred to as stop switches 21L to 21R), and A medal slot 25 is provided.

  The bet switch 15 is a switch that detects an operation for setting a bet amount for one medal using credits. The maximum bet switch 17 is a switch for detecting an operation for setting a bet number of medals for the maximum bet number using credits. The maximum bet number is the maximum number of bets that can be set for one game (hereinafter also referred to as one game) (in this embodiment, “3” except for “in bonus state”, “in bonus state” 2 ”).

  The effect operation unit 81 is a switch that detects an operation related to the effect. For operations related to production, operations for executing / developing production, operations for selecting production modes and characters, etc., and administrator menu for displaying player menu status and setting history etc. for displaying game history etc. This includes operations for shifting to a state.

  The start switch 19 is a switch that detects an operation for rotating each of the reels 11L to 11R to start variable display of symbols. The settlement switch 23 is a switch for detecting an operation for paying out medals corresponding to the number of credits or a set number of bets. The stop switches 21L to 21R are switches for detecting an operation for stopping rotation of the corresponding reel among the reels 11L to 11R to stop variable display of symbols. The medal slot 25 is an opening for a player to insert a medal.

  Various switches including the production operation unit 81 detect operations on the operation units (button units) corresponding to the switches. The operation unit corresponding to the various switches is composed of a transmissive member that transmits light. In addition, a light source such as an LED is mounted inside the operation unit corresponding to the various switches, and it produces effects by emitting light at a timing that allows operation according to the progress of the game (timing to accept the operation effectively). Execute.

  A lower panel 35 on which characters and the like are printed is provided below various operation units on the front door 5. Lower lamp portions 37L and 37R are provided on the left and right sides of the lower panel 35, respectively. The lower lamp portions 37L and 37R include light sources such as LEDs, for example, and perform effects by emitting light according to the progress of the game.

  Also, below the lower panel 35, a medal payout opening 39 for paying out medals in response to the occurrence of a winning combination, and a medal receiver 41 for receiving medals paid out from the medal payout opening 39 are provided. Speakers 31L and 31R are provided on the left and right sides of the medal payout opening 39 for performing effects by outputting sound effects and sounds according to the progress of the game.

  Next, the internal configuration of the housing 3 of the slot machine 1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, a reel unit 9 for receiving the reels 11 </ b> L to 11 </ b> R side by side is provided at the center in the housing 3 of the slot machine 1. The reel unit 9 is fixed to the rear wall in the housing 3. The reel unit 9 includes reel motors 14L, 14M, and 14R (see FIG. 4; hereinafter also referred to as reel motors 14L to 14R) and position sensors 55L, 55M, and 55R (see FIG. 4; hereinafter, both position sensors 55L to 55R). Say).

  Each of the reel motors 14L to 14R is fixed side by side with respect to the frame of the reel unit 9, and a corresponding reel among the reels 11L to 11R is fixed to a rotation shaft thereof. Accordingly, the reel motors 14L to 14R are driven and controlled to rotate and stop. The reel motors 14L to 14R are constituted by, for example, stepping motors.

  The position sensors 55L to 55R are sensors for detecting that the protrusions provided on the reels 11L to 11R have passed a predetermined position as the reel rotates. The position sensors 55L to 55R are configured by, for example, photo interrupters. When the position sensors 55L to 55R detect the protrusions of the corresponding reels, the symbol at the predetermined position of the reel (for example, the symbol of symbol number 19 in FIG. 3) is positioned in the middle stage of the display window 7. It is configured.

  Above the reel unit 9, the main control board 63 and the sub control board 73 are installed in a state of being housed in the board case. If a fraud is made to a control board or the like stored in the board case, in order to make it possible to easily identify the trace, for example, some members must be destroyed or the board cannot be contacted. It has a structure. The main control board 63 and the sub control board 73 are electrically connected by signal lines that connect the boards.

  A hopper unit 43 is provided below the reel unit 9. The hopper unit 43 includes a hopper container 42, a full sensor 58 (see FIG. 4), a hopper motor 57 (see FIG. 4), and a payout sensor 54 (see FIG. 4).

  The hopper container 42 is a container for storing medals received from the medal slot 25. The full tank sensor 58 is a sensor that is provided at a predetermined position of the hopper container 42 and detects that the medal stored in the hopper container 42 has reached a predetermined amount and is in a full state.

  The hopper motor 57 is a motor that is driven when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, and is driven to discharge a predetermined number of medals stored in the hopper container 42. The hopper motor 57 is constituted by, for example, a DC motor (Direct Current Motor). The payout sensor 54 is a sensor that detects medals discharged from the hopper container 42 by the hopper motor 57 one by one. The medals detected by the payout sensor 54 are paid out from the medal payout opening 39 via a medal chute 47 provided below the back side of the front door 5.

  On the left side of the hopper unit 43, a power supply unit 49 for supplying power to various devices included in the slot machine 1 is disposed. The power supply unit 49 is provided with a power switch 50, a reset switch 52, and a change process start switch 56.

  The power switch 50 is a switch for switching presence / absence of power supply to the slot machine 1. The reset switch 52 is a switch for detecting a setting value switching operation during a setting change process in which the setting value can be changed. The reset switch 52 is also used as a switch for canceling an error when an error occurs. The change process start switch 56 includes a key cylinder for setting change processing, and is a switch that detects an operation for shifting to setting change processing. The switches provided inside the housing 3 including the change processing start switch 56 are switches that can be operated when the front door 5 is opened. For this reason, basically, only the administrator of the game hall can operate.

  The set value is a value for specifying the degree of advantage for the player. Specifically, the set value is a value for specifying a winning probability of winning a winning combination predetermined in the winning lottery. In the winning lottery, the winning probabilities can be made different by using the winning probabilities corresponding to the set values that have been set. In other words, when the set values are different, the winning probabilities of winning in the winning lottery may be different even for the same winning combination. As a result, according to the set value, the number of medals to be paid out while the game is executed a predetermined number of times differs, and as a result, the payout rate can be made different. For this reason, it can be said that the set value is a value for specifying the degree of advantage for the player and a value for specifying the payout rate. As the set value, for example, 1 to 6 (4 levels of set values 1, 2, 5, and 6 in this embodiment) having different winning probabilities are provided, and the set value 1 is the lowest payout rate. The set value 6 is the highest payout rate. Note that the set values may be provided in six stages of 1 to 6. The setting value can be changed by switching to the setting change process by turning on the power with the change process start switch 56 turned ON by the setting change key managed by the game hall administrator.

  The set value can be sequentially switched by operating the reset switch 52 during the setting changing process (for example, 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 5...). During the setting change process, the set value is displayed on the payout display 46. In the setting change process, after the operation to the start switch 19 is detected, the change process start switch 56 is turned OFF to store the set value displayed at that time. Thereby, the change of the set value is completed, and in the subsequent games, a role lottery or the like described later is performed based on the stored set value. When the setting change process is performed, the RAM 65 of the slot machine 1 is initialized.

  On the back side of the front door 5, a medal selector 48 is disposed at a position corresponding to the back side of the medal slot 25. The medal selector 48 physically selects whether or not the medal inserted into the medal slot 25 is genuine, and the regular medal is placed on the first flow path 40 side for storing in the hopper container 42. On the other hand, the non-regular medal is guided to the second flow path 44 side to be discharged to the outside.

  The medal selector 48 includes a switching solenoid 51 (see FIG. 4) and a throwing sensor 53 (see FIG. 4). The switching solenoid 51 is a solenoid for forcibly switching a medal inserted according to a game situation (for example, when the reel is rotating and when the credit upper limit is reached) to the second flow path 44 side. The insertion sensor 53 is a sensor that detects medals guided to the first flow path 40 side one by one from medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 25. The medals detected by the insertion sensor 53 are stored in the hopper container 42 when the front door 5 is closed. On the other hand, the medal guided to the second flow path 44 side is discharged from the medal payout opening 39 through the medal chute 47.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 3, the structure of the symbol arrangement of each of the reels 11L to 11R will be described. On the reels 11L to 11R, a plurality of types of symbols are arranged in a predetermined order as shown in FIG. In FIG. 3, for convenience of explanation, a plurality of types of symbols are indicated by character strings such as “R7”, “G7”, “BR”, “C1”, “C2”, “BE”, “RP”, “MD”, “T1”, “T2”, and the like. Actually, however, the patterns corresponding to these character strings are arranged. For example, a red “7” pattern as “R7”, a green “7” pattern as “G7”, a “BAR” pattern as “BR”, a “Bell” pattern as “BE”, and a “RP” The pattern of “Replay” is arranged. The plural kinds of symbols are not limited to the symbols as long as they can be distinguished from other symbols, and may be any pattern, symbol, numeral, or the like. Note that “C1” and “C2” are configured by pictures having similar appearances, and thus are collectively referred to as “C”. Similarly, “T1” and “T2” are also composed of patterns having similar appearances, and are collectively referred to as “T”.

  In FIG. 3, symbol numbers 0 to 19 are shown at the left end in correspondence with symbol arrangement regions in which symbols are arranged on the reels 11L to 11R. The symbol numbers 0 to 19 are numbers for specifying which symbol arrangement region the symbol is in each of the reels 11L to 11R of the present embodiment.

  In the case of this embodiment, for example, a reel tape on which symbols of symbol numbers 0 to 19 are printed is attached to the peripheral surfaces of the reels 11L to 11R. Therefore, when the reels 11L to 11R are rotated, a plurality of symbols are variably displayed in the display window 7 in a predetermined order such as symbol numbers ... 19 → 18 → 17 →… 2 → 1 → 0 → 19 → 18. Can be made.

  In the slot machine 1 having the above-described configuration, first, a predetermined number required for starting one game when the medal insertion into the medal insertion slot 25 or the bet switch 15 is operated (in this embodiment, “in bonus state”). Except for “3” and “in bonus state” is set to “2”), the number of medals corresponding to the number of bets can be set to start rotation, and the start switch 19 is operated to operate the reels 11L˜ 11R is rotated to variably display symbols and one game is started. In the present embodiment, “3” is set as the prescribed number of game states other than “bonus state”, and “2” is set as the prescribed number of “bonus state”. The specified number is not limited to this, and may be another value, or the same value may be set regardless of the gaming state.

  After one game is started, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped by operating the stop switches 21L to 21R while the reel is rotating, and one game is ended by stopping the rotation of all the reels 11L to 11R. To do. The slot machine 1 newly gives a predetermined privilege to the player in accordance with the symbol combination (display result) when rotation of all the reels 11L to 11R is stopped. As the predetermined privilege, for example, transition of the gaming state, automatic setting of the number of bets for the next game without newly using medals, etc., a predetermined number of medals paid out (or credit addition), etc. However, it is not limited to these.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a main control board 63, a sub control board 73, a power supply unit 49, an external output board 90, and the like.

  The main control board 63 is a board on which a main CPU 61 that controls the progress of the game is mounted. The sub-control board 73 is a board on which a sub-CPU 71 that controls effects according to the progress of the game is mounted. The power supply unit 49 generates power for driving various electrical components mounted in the slot machine 1 using power supplied from the outside. The external output board 90 is a board for outputting a signal according to the progress of the game to the outside of the slot machine 1 (for example, a hall computer, a data display for each unit, etc.).

  The main CPU 61 includes a ROM 67 that stores a game control program for controlling the progress of the game, and a RAM 65 that temporarily stores data related to the game, and is realized by executing the game control program stored in the ROM 67. And various functions realized by controlling the hardware.

  The main CPU 61 has an interrupt function such as a timer interrupt, executes a game control program stored in the ROM 67, and receives a switch (operation means) or a sensor (detection means) connected to the main control board 63. Processing related to the progress of the game is performed based on the signal. Further, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not an error has occurred in the slot machine 1. The errors include, for example, a selector error detected for a predetermined time or more by the input sensor 53, a full error in which the hopper container 42 is detected to be full by the full sensor 58, and the hopper motor 57 being driven. However, it includes a medal expired error that has not been detected by the payout sensor 54 for a predetermined time or more.

  The switches and sensors connected to the main control board 63 include a closing sensor 53, a bet switch 15, a maximum bet switch 17, a start switch 19, a door sensor 20, stop switches 21L to 21R, and a checkout switch 23 shown in FIG. , A reset switch 52, a change processing start switch 56, position sensors 55L to 55R, a payout sensor 54, a full sensor 58, and the like.

  Further, the main CPU 61 performs processing related to the progress of the game, and drives and controls the devices connected to the main control board 63. The devices connected to the main control board 63 include a switching solenoid 51, a credit display 45, a payout display 46, a notification display 60, an advantageous period notification lamp 80, and reel motors 14L to 14R shown in FIG. , A hopper motor 57, and various LEDs. Further, the main control board 63 is mounted with a display unit composed of 7 segment LEDs. The main control board 63 has an advantageous period stay ratio during the advantageous period with respect to the entire game period, a bonus payout ratio with respect to the total payout number, and an advantageous period with respect to the total payout number of medals. A display for displaying the ratio of the total number of payouts between the number of payouts by the navigation effect (instruction) and the number of payouts in the bonus state (for example, also referred to as an instructed accessory ratio) is mounted. It should be noted that the advantageous period stay ratio, the accessory ratio, the instructed accessory ratio, etc. are not limited to those displayed on the display mounted on the main control board 63, but are provided separately (for example, payouts). It may be displayed on the display 46 or the like. In this case, for example, when the reset switch 52 is operated, the main CPU 61 may display the advantageous period stay ratio, the accessory ratio, the instructed accessory ratio, and the like on the display.

  The main control board 63 transmits various commands to the sub control board 73 as the game progresses. The sub control board 73 controls effects based on commands from the main control board 63. On the other hand, a command cannot be sent from the sub control board 73 to the main control board 63. The command is transmitted from the main control board 63 to the sub control board 73 only in one direction.

  The sub CPU 71 mounted on the sub control board 73 includes a ROM 77 for storing an effect control program for controlling the effect, and a RAM 75 for temporarily storing data related to the effect, and the effect control stored in the ROM 77. It has various functions realized by executing a program and various functions realized by controlling hardware.

  The sub CPU 71 has an interrupt function such as a timer interrupt, executes an effect control program stored in the ROM 77 based on a command from the main control board 63, and determines the effect contents according to the progress of the game. Etc., and based on the result, the devices connected to the sub-control board 73 are driven and controlled. The devices connected to the sub-control board 73 include the speakers 31L and 31R, the liquid crystal display 27, various lamps / LEDs, and an effect operation unit 81 shown in FIG. The liquid crystal display 27 includes a display control unit that executes display processing for displaying an image in the display area. The display control unit executes display processing based on a display control command from the sub control board 73 and displays a predetermined image in the display area of the liquid crystal display 27. The display control unit can also send a command to the sub-control board 73 according to the display content. The sub-control board 73 transmits a command corresponding to the speakers 31L, 31R and various lamps / LEDs based on a command from the display control unit, thereby producing an effect by sound or light corresponding to an image displayed in the display area. Is executed. The various lamps / LEDs controlled by the sub CPU 71 include LEDs mounted in the operation unit corresponding to the various switches. The sub CPU 71 can illuminate the operation unit by controlling the LED or the like so as to achieve power consumption corresponding to the controlled mode depending on whether or not the eco mode is set.

  The effect operation unit 81 includes a determination switch 81a for determination, a left selection switch 81b for selection, a right selection switch 81c, an upper selection switch 81d, and a lower selection switch 81e (these are collectively referred to as up / down / left / right switches). Is provided. The sub CPU 71 executes a promotion effect that prompts an operation to the decision switch 81a when executing or developing a predetermined effect, and executes or develops the predetermined effect by operating the decision switch 81a. To control. Further, the sub CPU 71 can select an effect mode that can be selected from a plurality of types of effect modes with different types of effects (characters and backgrounds) executed by the liquid crystal display 27 or the like (while an effect mode selection screen is being displayed). , One of the effect modes is selected by operating the up / down / left / right switch, and the effect mode selected by operating the decision switch 81a is set.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 shifts to the administrator menu state by operating the decision switch 81a when the change process start switch 56 is operated and shifts to the setting change process, and the administrator menu screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is possible to display on the device 27. On the administrator menu screen, “date and time setting”, “setting change history” display, “mobile-linked service ON / OFF setting”, “eco mode setting”, and the like can be performed. The eco mode refers to a mode that saves electric power consumed by the production execution by the devices connected to the sub-control board 73, compared to the normal time. When the eco mode is set, it is output from the speakers 31L and 31R, for example, control for lowering the brightness of the liquid crystal display 27, various lamps / LEDs, control for shortening the drive time or lighting time, and the normal mode. Control to reduce the volume is performed.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 does not rotate any of the reels 11 </ b> L to 11 </ b> R, and urges an operation to a specific effect (for example, a continuous effect that is continuous over a plurality of games or a specific button) that occurs as the game progresses. The determination switch 81a is in a state where a predetermined time has passed without any operation being detected (hereinafter also referred to as a standby state or a game standby state) when a chance button effect or the like is not being executed. Is operated to shift to the player menu state, and the player menu screen can be displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. In the standby state, a guidance effect (included in the promotion effect) for prompting an operation to the decision switch 81a and guiding to the player menu state is executed. By operating the determination switch 81a during the guidance effect, the player menu state is displayed and the player menu screen is displayed.

  In addition, on the player menu screen, for example, in accordance with an operation on the production operation unit 81, for example, confirmation of a role history such as the number of occurrences and the probability of winning, and a mobile linked service for accumulating a player's game history (Hereinafter, also referred to as mobile link) setting, volume setting output from the speakers 31L and 31R, brightness adjustment of the liquid crystal display 27, and the like can be performed. In addition, although the example in which the setting of the eco mode can be set in the administrator menu state will be described, the present invention is not limited to this and may be set in the player menu state.

  The sub CPU 71 selects an item or target to be displayed by operating the up / down / left / right switch in the administrator menu state or the player menu state, and according to the item or target selected by operating the determination switch 81a. Execute the process. Note that the sub CPU 71 may shift to the player menu state by operating the determination switch 81a even when a specific effect is being executed. In this case, the sub CPU 71 draws an image of a specific effect on a specific layer, and a player menu screen in the player menu state in a layer having a higher priority than the specific layer by operating the decision switch 81a. By drawing this image, the player menu screen may be displayed with priority. Note that while the player menu screen is displayed, a specific effect in a specific layer may be continuously executed, or a specific effect in a specific layer may be temporarily ended.

  Further, when a specific effect is continuously executed in a specific layer while the player menu screen is displayed, and when the effect is a continuous effect without a chance button effect that prompts an operation to a specific button, While the player menu screen can be displayed by operating the determination switch 81a, the player menu screen is displayed even if the determination switch 81a is operated when the effect is a chance button effect that prompts an operation to a specific button. You may make it not. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the chance button effect from being unintentionally developed to the next stage by the operation of the decision switch 81a while the player menu screen is displayed. In addition, the switch for displaying the player menu screen and the switch for developing the chance button effect may be the same switch or may be physically different switches. Even if the switch for displaying the player menu screen is different from the switch for developing the chance button effect, the switch for developing the chance button effect is displayed while the player menu screen is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the production from being developed unintentionally.

<Game control processing>
The main CPU 61 performs a game control process for controlling the progress of the game based on the game control program stored in the ROM 67. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining an example of the game control process.

(Betting number setting process)
In the bet amount setting process of S100, the bet number is determined according to the detection signal from the insertion sensor 53, the operation signal from the bet switch 15 or the maximum bet switch 17, the re-game flag set at the time of winning the re-gamer, and the like. Processing for setting is performed. In the bet number setting process, a bet number setting command is output when the bet number is set. When the set number of bets has reached the specified number, a state in which rotation can be started (validation) in which an operation to the start switch 19 is received effectively is set.

  In the betting number setting process, a driving signal for driving the hopper motor 57 is output based on an operation signal from the settlement switch 23, and a number of medals corresponding to the credit amount or the set betting number are paid out. A checkout process is performed. The betting number setting process ends when an operation signal is received from the start switch 19 in a state where rotation can be started, and the process proceeds to the internal lottery process of S200. In the bet number setting process, when an operation signal from the start switch 19 is received and the process proceeds to the internal lottery process, a bet command that can specify the actually set bet number (the number of medals) is output. As a result, the number of medals set for one game can be specified on the sub-control board 73 side.

(Internal lottery process)
In the internal lottery process of S200, a random number value for role lottery is extracted from a random number circuit that updates a random number value within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535), and is determined in advance based on the extracted value (hereinafter referred to as an extracted value). In addition, a lottery for lottery of whether or not to win any one of a plurality of types of roles is performed. With reference to FIG. 6, the types and names of the roles set in the slot machine 1 will be described.

  As types of combinations, a bonus combination, a replay combination, and a small combination are provided. The bonus combination is a transition combination accompanied by a transition to a bonus state where the winning probability of the small combination is high. The re-game combination (hereinafter also referred to as replay) is a combination that sets the above-mentioned re-play flag when winning. In the betting number setting process, when the re-game flag is set, the medals (or credits) owned by the player are not newly used, and the specified number of games (current game) to be started next (from now) is set. This is the role of automatically setting the corresponding bet number as the bet number of the next game. A small combination is a combination that involves paying out a predetermined number of medals (or adding credits).

  As bonus combinations, combination names “RBB1” and “RBB2” (hereinafter collectively referred to as bonus combinations or “RBB”) are provided. For the symbol combinations “RBB1” and “RBB2”, a combination of three “R7” and three “G7” is defined. When winning “RBB1” and “RBB2”, the bonus state is controlled. The bonus state ends when the number of medals paid out exceeds the number of medals corresponding to the winning bonus combination (the number described in the remarks column in FIG. 6).

  As re-playing roles, role names “RPC”, “RTT1” to “RTT9” are provided. In the “RPC” symbol combination, a combination of three “RP” is defined. For “RTT1” to “RTT9”, symbol combinations as shown in FIG. 6 are defined. When the symbol combinations “RTT1” to “RTT9” are stopped on the winning line NL, the “T” symbols are stopped at the lower, middle and upper stages of the reels 11L to 11R, or the “BR” symbols are displayed at the lower stage of the reels 11L. The “T” symbols stop at the middle stage of the reel 11M and the upper stage of the reel 11R, and the “T” symbols are obliquely aligned at least partially. Further, “RTT1” to “RTT9” are also referred to as promoted replays because they serve as an opportunity to control the advantageous RT.

  As the small roles, role names “BEL”, “ATA1” to “ATA12”, and “CH” are provided. For the symbol combination “BEL”, a combination of three “BE” is defined. For “ATA1” to “ATA12” and “CH”, symbol combinations as shown in FIG. 6 are defined. “BEL” is a winning state when the pressing order is correct in a gaming state where the specified number is set to “3” (other than “bonus state”), and nine medals are paid out, whereas In the “bonus state” in which “2” is set, “12” medals are paid out regardless of the pressing order. “ATA1” to “ATA12” can be awarded according to the operation timing to the stop switches 21L to 21R when the pressing order is incorrect (failed), and one medal is paid out. When “CH” wins, one medal is paid out.

  In the internal lottery process, a role lottery is performed for each of a plurality of types of winning combination groups including predetermined roles among the combinations shown in FIG. With reference to FIG. 7, a winning combination group and a combination of roles in the present embodiment will be described.

  As the winning combination group including the bonus combination, “bonus 1” and “bonus 2” are provided. “Bonus 1” and “Bonus 2” are winning combination groups each consisting of one bonus combination. The winning combination group including the bonus combination may include not only the bonus combination but also a winning combination group that is won at the same time as another combination (for example, CH).

  As the winning combination group of the re-gamer, “normal lip” and “promotion lip” are provided. The “normal lip” is a winning combination group including only “RPC”. On the other hand, “Elevation Lip” is a winning combination group composed of “RTT1” to “RTT9”.

  As a winning combination group of small roles, “left correct answer bell 1” to “right correct answer bell 4” and “single-piece role” are provided. “Left correct answer bell 1” to “right correct answer bell 4” include two or more types of combinations of “ATA1” to “ATA12” in addition to “BEL”, and include combinations that are different from each other. This is a winning group consisting of “Left correct bell 1” to “right correct bell 4” are collectively referred to as “push order bell”. “One piece combination” is a winning combination group composed of “CH”.

  Among these plural types of winning combination groups, the winning combination group that is the target of the lottery is determined for each of the plurality of types of gaming states. The determination value related to the winning probability in the winning lottery is determined according to the winning winning group, the gaming state being controlled, and the set value that has been set.

  The gaming states that can be controlled in the slot machine 1 include “initial RT”, “normal RT”, “advantageous RT”, “RBB internal winning state” in which “RBB” has been won, and bonus combination winnings A “bonus state” is provided. “Initial RT”, “normal RT”, and “advantage RT” are collectively referred to as a general gaming state.

  Among the winning combination groups including bonus combinations, “Bonus 1” and “Bonus 2” are subject to combination lottery in the general gaming state. For each of the winning combination groups including the bonus combination, for example, when the setting value is 1, the determination value is determined so that the winning probability is 1/1000. The determination value of the winning combination group including the bonus combination is determined according to the set value, and the winning probability increases as the set value increases. For example, when the setting value is 6, the determination value is determined so that the winning probability is 1/900. It should be noted that “bonus 1” and “bonus 2” may have determination values determined so as to win with a uniform probability regardless of the set value.

  Next, in the winning combination group including the re-gamer, “normal lip” is a target lottery in the general gaming state and “RBB internal winning state”, and the winning probability during “advantage RT” is 1/1. Thus, the determination value is determined so that the winning probability in “normal RT” and “initial RT” is 1/8, and the winning probability in “RBB internal winning state” is 1/3. In addition, “promotional lip” is a target for lottery only in “normal RT”, and a determination value is set so that a winning probability is 1/20. The winning probability of the winning combination group including the re-gamer is a winning probability corresponding to the type of RT being controlled.

  The determination value is stored so that the probability of winning either the normal lip or the promotion lip has a relationship of “normal RT” ≦ “initial RT” <“RBB internal winning state” <“advantage RT”. For this reason, “advantageous RT” in the general gaming state can be said to be an advantageous state for the player because the winning probability of the re-gamer is improved as compared with other gaming states.

  Among the winning combination groups including small roles, “Left correct answer bell 1” to “Right correct answer bell 4” are subject to role lottery in the general gaming state, “RBB internal winning state”, and “bonus state”. The probability of winning one of “Left correct answer bell 1” to “Right correct answer bell 4” is 1/5 in the general gaming state, etc., and each of “Left correct answer bell 1” to “Right correct answer bell 4” is selected. The determination values are equally distributed so that the probabilities are the same. In the “bonus state”, the judgment value is determined so that “Left correct answer bell 1” to “Right correct answer bell 4” are won with a probability of 1/1, and “Left correct answer bell” is determined for each game. Winners of “BEL” by winning all of “1” to “Right Correct Bell 4”. The “bonus state” can be said to be an advantageous state for the player because the probability of winning the “BEL” is improved as compared to the general gaming state.

  “One piece combination” is a subject of lottery in the general gaming state, “RBB internal winning state”. The probability of winning a “single player” in a general gaming state is determined by a common judgment value regardless of the set value so that the probability is 1/50 regardless of which set value is set. It has been. The winning combination group is not limited to the type shown in FIG. Further, the winning combination group in which the setting difference is provided and the winning combination group in which the setting difference is not provided are not limited to the winning combination group described with reference to FIG.

  In the internal lottery process, the determination value (determination value according to the set value) of the winning combination group that is the target of the combination lottery in the current game state is read and subtracted from the extracted value (extracted value is updated) A determination process for determining whether or not is a value smaller than a predetermined value (for example, 0) is performed, and if it is not a small value (for example, 0 or more), a determination process for the next winning group is performed. Repeat the cycle.

  When it is determined in the determination process for any winning combination group that the value is smaller than the predetermined value, it is determined that the winning combination group has been won, and the winning flag of the combination included in the winning combination group is determined. Is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 65, and the lottery is finished. For this reason, the probability of winning the winning combination group is “the winning combination group determination value / 65536”. It can be said that the winning combination group has a high winning probability because the larger the determination value read in the winning lottery, the smaller the predetermined value. On the other hand, when all the winning combination groups subject to the role lottery are determined, but it is determined that the value is not smaller than the predetermined value, it is determined that no winning group has been won. It is determined that In this embodiment, the probability of “out of” is determined to be about 19% during the advantageous RT, but is not limited to this, and for example, has a very low probability (5%, etc.). It may be determined.

  The internal lottery process terminates the role lottery when it is determined that one of the winning group is won, or when it is determined that the winning group has not won any of the winning group. , The process proceeds to the advantageous period related processing of S300.

  In the internal lottery process, a process for outputting a winning type command that can specify the type of the winning combination group won in the winning lottery to the sub-control board 73 is performed. For example, when “Bonus 1” or “Bonus 2” is won, a winning type command that can specify that any “RBB” is won is output, and when “Normal Lip” or “Promotion Lip” is won, any A winning type command that can specify that the player is elected as a re-game player is output, and when one of “Left correct answer bell 1” to “Right correct answer bell 4” is elected, the push order bell is won. A winning type command that can specify that is output. Thereby, on the sub-control board 73 side, it is possible to execute an effect according to the type of the winning combination group.

(Advantageous period related processing)
In the advantageous period related processing in S300, processing related to the advantageous period is performed. In the present embodiment, in the normal period, it is possible to control the advantageous period when a predetermined advantageous period transition condition is satisfied. The advantageous period includes an advantageous general, a chance zone (hereinafter referred to as CZ), and an assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT). The general advantage is a period in which the CZ transfer lottery for determining whether to shift to CZ can be executed. CZ is a period during which an AT shift lottery for determining whether or not to shift to an AT capable of executing an AT game can be executed. In addition, in the general advantage, the AT transition lottery may be executed in addition to the CZ transition lottery. In this case, for example, the probability of winning in the AT transition lottery is in the CZ rather than the advantageous general lottery. It may be determined to be higher.

  Advantageous general and CZ in the advantageous period are periods in which the payout rate during the period does not exceed 1 (for example, also referred to as a non-playing period during the advantageous period), whereas AT is used for AT games. In other words, as a result of maintaining the advantageous RT (RT1 having a high winning probability of the re-gamer), it can be said that the payout rate during AT exceeds 1 (for example, also referred to as a payout period during the advantageous period). In the advantageous period, it is first advantageously controlled in general. Further, during the general advantage, it is possible to control to CZ by winning in the CZ transition lottery performed when a predetermined CZ transition lottery condition is satisfied. Further, during CZ, it is possible to control the AT by winning in the AT transition lottery performed when a predetermined AT transition lottery condition is satisfied. Therefore, it can be said that the advantageous period is a period that can be controlled by the AT. Further, it can be said that the AT in the advantageous period is an advantageous state advantageous to the player.

  The predetermined advantageous period transition condition is a condition that is established based on the result of the winning lottery in the internal lottery process, and includes a condition that is established by winning one of the winning combination groups shown in FIG. The conditions for transitioning to the advantageous period are also established by winning a winning group with a set difference in winning probability, and also by winning a winning group with no set difference in winning probability. To do. The condition for shifting to the advantageous period may be established by winning a specific winning combination group that is uniformly determined regardless of the type of state in which the winning probability in the winning lottery is controlled. “The winning probability in the role lottery is uniformly determined regardless of the type of the controlled state” means that the winning probability in the role lottery is uniformly determined in any state described later with reference to FIG. Say what you are.

  Each of the predetermined CZ transition lottery condition and the predetermined AT transition lottery condition also includes, for example, a condition that is established by winning the “one-piece combination” and a condition that is established by winning “bonus 1” or “bonus 2”. For this reason, for example, when winning “one winning combination”, “bonus 1”, or “bonus 2”, the advantageous transition condition is satisfied, and the CZ transition lottery condition and the AT transition lottery condition are satisfied. As a result, even during the normal period, by winning “One-Board”, “Bonus 1” or “Bonus 2”, and winning in the CZ transition lottery and AT transition lottery, It can also be controlled. The advantageous period transition condition, the CZ transition lottery condition, and the AT transition lottery condition may be exactly the same condition, may be completely different conditions, or may include common conditions. .

  As will be described later, the conditions for ending the advantageous period are the first condition established when the advantageous period counter = 1500 indicating that the upper limit value of the advantageous period (for example, the upper limit number of games: 1500) has been reached, and the number of bets in the advantageous period. From the base value, the lowest cumulative value of the total number of differences based on the number of medals and the number of medals awarded is 0, and the current cumulative number from the base point reaches the upper limit of the advantageous period (for example, the upper limit cumulative number: 2400) Including a second condition that is satisfied. The cumulative number is specified according to the value of the cumulative number counter updated during the advantageous period. Both the advantageous period counter and the cumulative number counter are updated in a predetermined area of the RAM 65.

  As a condition for ending the advantageous period, there is a third condition that is established by digesting the game a predetermined number of times (CZ non-winning) without being transferred to CZ in the general advantage, or to the AT during CZ. The fourth condition that is satisfied by digesting the game a predetermined number of times (AT is not elected), the fifth condition that is satisfied when the AT game number counter (described later) becomes 0 during AT, and the AT ends, etc. Including. Hereinafter, conditions for ending the advantageous period (any of advantageous general, CZ and AT) are collectively referred to as “conditions for ending the advantageous period”. The conditions for ending the advantageous period are not limited to those exemplified in the present embodiment as long as they include at least the first condition and the second condition, and may be satisfied by other specific events. Good.

  In the advantageous period-related processing, during the advantageous period, the advantageous period may end with the end of the predetermined CZ transition lottery condition, the predetermined AT transition lottery condition (for example, winning a predetermined winning group), and the current game. It is determined whether or not the situation (for example, the upper limit number of games (1500) or the upper limit cumulative number (2400) of the advantageous period has been reached by the current game) is reached. Perform an effect that speaks something. For example, the main CPU 61 drives and controls the payout display 46, the notification display 60, and the like in such a manner that all segments blink.

  In the advantageous period-related processing, the main CPU 61 determines that during the advantageous period, when the advantageous period can end with the predetermined CZ transition lottery condition, the predetermined AT transition lottery condition, and the end of the current game. A condition-related command that can specify a condition that may be satisfied is output to the sub-control board 73. Accordingly, for example, the liquid crystal display 27 can notify the possibility that the predetermined CZ transition lottery condition, the predetermined AT transition lottery condition, and the condition for ending the advantageous period are satisfied. As described above, the advantageous period-related processing is to execute processing according to whether or not conditions relating to the advantageous period can be established. The process for actually shifting to the advantageous period, the process for determining whether or not the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied, and the process for ending the advantageous period are performed by the advantageous period setting process of S700 described later. Is called.

  Further, in the advantageous period related process, it is possible to execute a notification process for notifying the advantageous operation mode by the notification display 60 according to the result of the winning lottery during the AT in the advantageous period. For example, when “Left correct answer bell 1” in the winning combination group is won, the notification display 60 is configured to stop from the left reel 11L to win “BEL” as will be described later. The notification display 60 is driven and controlled in such a manner that the segment (one of the upper and lower two lower left sides) corresponding to the uppercase letter “L” of the seven segments is lit. Further, in the advantageous period related processing, an advantageous operation mode command capable of specifying the advantageous operation mode is output. Thereby, the effect for notifying the advantageous operation mode can be executed on the liquid crystal display 27 etc. also on the sub-control board 73 side. When the advantageous period related process ends, the process proceeds to the reel control process of S400.

(Reel control processing)
In the reel control process of S400, the reel motors 14L to 14R are driven and controlled, and the reels 11L to 11R are rotated and stopped. In the reel control process, it is determined whether the wait time has elapsed. The wait time is set to 4.1 seconds, for example, and measurement is started after the rotation of each of the reels 11L to 11R is started in the reel control process of the previous game.

  In the reel control process, when it is determined that the wait time has elapsed, a reel rotation process for starting the rotation of the reels 11L to 11R is performed. Thereby, it is possible to delay the timing of starting the rotation of the reels 11L to 11R in the current game until at least 4.1 seconds have elapsed since the rotation of each of the reels 11L to 11R was started in the previous game. In the reel rotation process, when the reels 11L to 11R start to rotate, a reel rotation start command is output.

  In the reel control processing, after the reels 11L to 11R start to rotate and reach a constant speed (for example, after the excitation patterns of the reel motors 14L to 14R become an excitation pattern with a constant speed), the reels 11L to 11R Each reference position is detected by each of the position sensors 55L to 55R, so that the stop operation is possible, and the operation to the stop switches 21L to 21R is effectively received (validated).

  In the reel control process, when the stop switch is operated in a state where the stop operation is possible, for example, the reels are arranged within a predetermined retractable range from a symbol positioned on the reel winning line NL corresponding to the stop switch. A reel stop process is performed in which one of the symbols is drawn into the winning line NL to stop the reel. The drawable range is the range up to 4 symbols ahead, and when the stop switch is operated, the symbols arranged from the symbols on the winning line NL to the 4 symbols ahead can be stopped on the winning line NL. Become.

  If you have won any of the roles in the draw, you can draw the symbols on the winning line when the symbols that make up the winning combination can be drawn on the winning line within the drawable range. Stop. On the other hand, if any winning combination is not won, the winning symbol combination that does not win any winning combination is drawn on the winning line and stopped. For this reason, when an operation to the stop switch is performed, if the symbol constituting the winning combination can be drawn on the winning line NL within the drawable range, the symbol is drawn on the winning line NL. While it can be stopped, the symbol combination of the winning combination is not stopped on the winning line NL.

  In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, “If any part is won in the part lottery, the symbols constituting the part that is won can be drawn on the winning line within the drawable range. " Here, since the lottery is performed for each “winning role group”, the “winning role” corresponds in detail to any one of the winning “winning role group”. It will be a thing.

  In the reel stop process, symbols within the drawable range can be stopped on the winning line NL, but symbols outside the drawable range cannot be stopped on the payline NL. For this reason, in the symbol arrangement of the reels 11L to 11R, if there is a place where the symbols constituting the role do not exist within the retractable range, even if the winning timing is selected in the winning lottery, the winning line is not met. There is a case where a symbol constituting the winning combination cannot be drawn on the NL and the winning combination is missed (non-winning).

  As shown in FIG. 3, the symbols constituting the “bonus combination” have a portion that does not exist within the retractable range in the symbol arrangement of the reels. For example, only one symbol “R7” constituting “RBB1” is arranged on the reels 11L to 11R. Further, the symbols constituting “RBB2” also have a portion that does not exist within the retractable range in at least one reel. For this reason, the “bonus combination” may not be able to be drawn into the winning line depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 21L to 21R, and may be missed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7, when one of the “bonus combination” is won, reel control is performed to draw the selected bonus combination within the drawable range, but no combination is won. Occurs. If “RBB1” and “RBB2” cannot be won in the winning game, the process of carrying over the winning flag for the bonus combination is performed until the bonus combination is won under the control of the RBB internal winning state. Is called.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the symbols “RP” constituting “RPC” included in “normal lip” are arranged within the retractable range in all of the reels 11L to 11R. In addition, the symbols constituting each of “RTT1” to “RTT9” included in the “promotional lip” have a portion that does not exist within the retractable range in the reel symbol arrangement, but when the “promotional lip” is selected, “RTT1” ~ Win all of “RTT9”. As a result, when “promotion lip” is won, any one of “RTT1” to “RTT9” can be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 21L to 21R.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the symbols (“R7” and “MD”) constituting “CH” included in the “one-piece combination” among the small combinations are not within the retractable range in the reel symbol arrangement. To do. For this reason, even if the “one-piece combination” is won, depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 21L to 21R, the symbols constituting “CH” may not be drawn into the winning line and may be missed. .

  Further, in the reel stop process, when a plurality of types of winning combinations are won, depending on the type of winning combination (result of winning lottery), the operation timing of the stop switches 21L to 21R, and the pressing order (operation mode). A target to be preferentially drawn in is determined in advance.

  Here, the reel stop process when one of “left correct answer bell 1” to “right correct answer bell 4” is won will be described. When any one of “Left correct answer bell 1” to “Right correct answer bell 4” is selected, the target to be pulled in preferentially is determined to be different depending on the type of the first stopped reel. The first stop means that the reels are stopped first when all the reels 11L to 11R are rotating. The first stopped reel is also referred to as a first stop reel. The second stop means stopping when one reel is stopped by the first stop and the remaining two reels are rotating, and the third stop is when the remaining one reel is rotating. Sometimes it is stopped. The operations on the stop switch for the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop are also referred to as a first stop operation, a second stop operation, and a third stop operation.

  For example, when “Left Correct Bell 1” is won, as shown in FIG. 7, when the left first stop (the left reel 11L is first stopped), “BEL” has priority over other roles. It is stipulated to be drawn in. Since the symbols “BE” constituting “BEL” are arranged within the retractable range, the “BEL” is not missed. Therefore, when “left correct answer bell 1” is won and the first left stop, reel control is performed so that “BEL” is always won.

  On the other hand, when “Left correct answer bell 1” is won, when the middle or right first stop (the middle or right reel 11M or 11R is first stopped), “BEL” is won simultaneously. It is determined that ATA1 "or" ATA4 "is preferentially drawn. The symbols “R7”, “T1”, and “T2” that constitute “ATA1” and “ATA4” are not arranged within the retractable range from the symbol arrangement of the reels 11L to 11R as shown in FIG. There are places. For this reason, depending on the operation timing of the stop switch, the symbols constituting “ATA1” and “ATA4” cannot be drawn into the winning line, and even if “Left correct answer bell 1” is won, any combination is awarded. There are cases where it is not possible.

  Also, even when “Left correct answer bell 2” to “Left correct answer bell 4” are selected, “BEL” can always be won when the first stop is left, but when “BEL” is first stopped, the “BEL” Since the other winning combination is preferentially drawn, and the symbol arrangement of the reels 11L to 11R is a symbol arrangement in which there are places where the symbols constituting the other winning combination cannot be drawn, the stop switch Depending on the operation timing, there is a case where no winning combination can be won. Similarly, even when “Medium correct answer bell 1” to “Medium correct answer bell 4” are selected, “BEL” can always be won when the first stop is made. However, when the left or right first stop is performed, the other winning combination which is selected at the same time is preferentially drawn over “BEL”, and the symbol arrangement of the reels 11L to 11R draws the symbols constituting the other winning combination. Since it is a symbol arrangement in which there are places that cannot be played, depending on the operation timing of the stop switch, it may not be possible to win any combination. Even when “right correct answer bell 1” to “right correct answer bell 4” are selected, “BEL” can always be won when the first stop on the right, but from “BEL” when the first stop on the left or middle is made. Since the other winning combination is preferentially drawn, and the symbol arrangement of the reels 11L to 11R is a symbol arrangement in which there are places where the symbols constituting the other winning combination cannot be drawn, the stop switch Depending on the operation timing, there is a case where no winning combination can be won. In addition, when all of “Left correct answer bell 1” to “Right correct answer bell 4” are won (for example, during the “bonus state”, etc.), regardless of the operation mode of the stop switches 21L to 21R, The reel control is performed so as to win the “BEL”.

  The order of pushing “BEL” when winning one of “Left correct answer bell 1” to “Right correct answer bell 4” is also referred to as a correct answer procedure. When one of “Left correct answer bell 1” to “Right correct answer bell 4” is won during the AT described above, information that can specify the correct procedure is notified as an advantageous operation mode.

  When winning one of “Left Correct Bell 1” to “Right Correct Bell 4”, any of the winning roles of “ATA1” to “ATA12” cannot be operated in the correct procedure. When the stop operation is performed at a timing at which it is not possible to win a prize, a specification that does not stop on the winning line when "Left correct answer bell 1" to "Right correct answer bell 4" is not selected among the "out of" symbol combinations The reel control for drawing the “out of” symbol combination on the winning line is performed. A specific “out of” symbol combination is accompanied by a transition to “normal RT” when stopped on the winning line NL in “initial RT” or “advantage RT”. For this reason, a specific “out” symbol combination is also referred to as a normal transition event (see FIG. 7).

  In addition, in the reel stop processing when a re-playing role or a small role is won in a state where the winning of a bonus role is carried over (RBB internal winning state), the re-playing role or the small role is drawn with priority over the bonus role. It is prescribed as follows.

  In the reel stop process, every time one of the reels 11L to 11R stops, a reel stop command capable of specifying the stopped reel and the stop position (for example, the symbol number of the symbol stopped in the middle stage) is issued. Output. Thereby, the sub control board 73 can specify the stopped reel and the stop position, and can execute the corresponding effect. When all of the reels 11L to 11R are stopped, the process proceeds to the exit determination process of S500.

(Outgoing judgment process)
In the outcome determination process of S500, a process corresponding to the symbol combination is executed based on the symbol combination on the winning line NL. For example, when a small combination wins, a payout process for paying out a medal described in the payout column of FIG. 6 or adding a credit is executed. In the payout process, a payout command that can specify the number of medals (including 0) given to the player by paying out medals or adding credits is output. Thereby, it is possible to specify the number of medals given to the player as a result of one game even on the sub-control board 73 side. Also, when the re-game player wins, a process for setting a re-game flag is executed. In the outcome determination process, a game result command capable of specifying the symbol combination on the winning line NL, the presence / absence of winning, the type of winning combination, etc. is output. Thereby, on the sub-control board 73 side, it is possible to execute an effect according to the symbol combination on the winning line NL. Further, in the outcome determination process, the advantageous period stay ratio and the accessory ratio are updated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 65 in accordance with the game result. When the outcome determination process ends, the process proceeds to a game state setting process of S600.

(Game state setting process)
In the game state setting process of S600, a game state flag that can specify the next and subsequent game states is set based on a lottery drawing or a game result. The game state flag is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 65. The main CPU 61 identifies the currently controlled gaming state based on the gaming state flag. FIG. 8A shows the transition of the gaming state.

  The game state setting process sets a game state flag that can specify “normal RT” when the normal transition outcome is stopped on the winning line NL in “initial RT” or “advantage RT”. Also, the game state setting process sets a game state flag that can identify “advantageous RT” when winning “RTT1” to “RTT9” that are promoted replays in “normal RT”.

  In addition, the game state setting process can specify “RBB internal winning state” when no winning is made in a game that has won “RBB” in any of “initial RT”, “normal RT” and “advantaged RT” Set the gaming status flag. The game state setting process sets a game state flag that can specify the “bonus state” when winning the “RBB”. The game state setting process counts the number of payouts in the “bonus state”, and sets a game state flag that can identify “initial RT” when the payout number exceeds a predetermined number. Further, the slot machine 1 sets a game state flag that can specify “initial RT” when initialized by a setting change or the like. When the gaming state setting process ends, the process proceeds to an advantageous period setting process of S700.

  Here, the transition of the gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. Below, the transition of the gaming state when not controlled by the AT in the advantageous period (hereinafter also referred to as non-AT) will be described first.

  When the slot machine 1 is initialized by a setting change or the like, the gaming state is set to the initial RT and the game is started. In the initial RT, the “push order bell” is won with a relatively high probability (1/5), while the AT game for notifying the advantageous operation mode is not performed when the “push order bell” is won. For this reason, the push-down bell is missed at a relatively early timing, and the normal transition event is stopped, and the normal RT is controlled.

  In normal RT, when “promotion replay” is won and “promotion replay” wins, it is controlled to advantageous RT. However, since it is still non-AT after being controlled to the advantageous RT, as in the initial RT, the “push order bell” wins with a relatively high probability, and as a result, the normal transition outcome is stopped at a relatively early timing. Therefore, it is controlled to “normal RT”. Therefore, during non-AT, most of the games are played at normal RT.

  Even if “RBB” is won during normal RT or the like, it is not possible to win a prize unless the symbols constituting the “RBB” are stopped at a timing at which the symbols can be drawn onto the winning line NL. As a result, if the game won for “RBB” cannot be won, the game is controlled to “RBB internal winning state”.

  When “RBB” is won, the game is controlled to the “bonus state”. During RBB, winning “BEL” regardless of the operation mode as a result of winning all of “Left Correct Bell 1” to “Right Correct Bell 4” with high probability. it can. When the number of payouts exceeds a predetermined number, the bonus ends and the control is made to “initial RT”.

  On the other hand, when the AT is controlled during the advantageous period, the advantageous operation mode for winning the “BEL” when the “push order bell” is won during the “normal RT” and “advantage RT” is a notification. Notification is given by the display 60 and the liquid crystal display 27. Thereby, as long as the stop operation is not mistaken, “BEL” can be surely won. As a result, the rate at which nine medals are paid out increases. In addition, since it is possible to avoid the normal transition outcome, it is possible to prevent a fall from “advantage RT” to “regular RT”, and it is advantageous that the ratio of winning and winning the “re-gamer” has been increased. You can play games in the state. The CZ in the advantageous period is terminated by notifying the advantageous operation mode when the “push order bell” is won after the game has been performed a predetermined number of times.

  In addition, after the RBB won during the AT is over, the number of AT games is carried over, so the AT is again performed, the advantageous operation mode is notified, and the “advantage RT” is controlled. After the RBB won during AT is over, the period controlled to “Initial RT” and “Normal RT” until it is controlled to “Advantage RT” is the preparation stage until it is controlled to “Advantage RT” It is also called a preparation period. In addition, when “Push Order Bell” is won during the “Initial RT” controlled after the RBB won during the AT, the “Bell” is won in order to be able to shift to “Normal RT”. An advantageous operation mode for making it happen is not notified.

(Advantageous period setting process)
In the advantageous period setting process of S700, the advantageous period is controlled based on the fact that the advantageous period transition condition is satisfied in the normal period. In the advantageous period setting process, the advantageous general flag is set based on the fact that the advantageous period transition condition is satisfied, and the advantageous general control is performed as shown in FIG. When controlling in general, an advantageous general game number counter for specifying the number of games that can be controlled in general is set. The number of games that can be controlled generally is determined by lottery from, for example, 0 to 750 games. Note that the number of games that can be controlled in general is not limited to those determined from the number of games, and may be a predetermined number. When the advantageous period is controlled, an upper limit value 1500 is set as an advantageous period counter for specifying the number of games executed since the advantageous period started.

  In the advantageous period setting process, when it is determined that the CZ transition lottery is won during the general advantageous period, the CZ flag is set and controlled to CZ. At this time, a CZ game number counter is set for specifying the number of games that can be controlled in CZ in the advantageous period. The number of games that can be controlled by CZ is determined by lottery, for example, from the number of games from 0 to 750. Note that the number of games that can be controlled by the CZ is not limited to those determined from the number of games, and may be a predetermined number. In the advantageous period setting process, when it is determined that the AT shift lottery is won during CZ, the AT flag is set and the AT is controlled. At this time, in the advantageous period setting process, a remaining AT game number counter for specifying the number of games that can be controlled by the AT in the advantageous period is set. The main CPU 61 controls an advantageous period including advantageous general, CZ, and AT based on the values of these counters. The advantageous general game number counter, the CZ game number counter, the remaining AT game number counter, and the advantageous period counter are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 65. The main CPU 61 determines whether the current period is the advantageous period or the normal period based on the advantageous period counter, and is in any one of the advantageous periods based on the advantageous general flag, the CZ flag, and the AT flag. Is identified.

  Hereinafter, setting and transition of the advantageous period will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the sub-control board 73 performs an effect based on a state command for specifying a controlled state or period as described later. For example, in the liquid crystal display 27 or the like, a background image corresponding to a controlled state or period may be displayed. Specifically, in the advantageous period of the normal period and the advantageous period, a background image reminiscent of daytime is displayed. On the other hand, in CZ in the advantageous period, a background image reminiscent of evening or night may be displayed. In the AT, a background image (see FIG. 20 and the like) corresponding to the AT may be displayed. In this way, the controlled state or period may be specified from the content of the effect. In any state, various effects (chance button effect, continuous effect, battle effect, etc.) can be executed.

  In the advantageous period setting process in the normal period, when a predetermined advantageous period transition condition is satisfied in the current game, the advantageous general game number is determined and the number of games is set in the advantageous general game number counter. A flag is set to control during an advantageous period (an advantageous general period of advantageous periods). As a result, as shown in FIG. 8 (b), an advantageous general control from the normal period to the advantageous period is performed. As described above, when starting the advantageous period, 1500, which is the upper limit value of the advantageous period, is set as the value of the advantageous period counter.

  In the advantageous period setting process after the advantageous period is controlled, the advantageous general game number counter is decremented by 1 every time one game is executed, and the advantageous period counter value is decremented by 1. In this embodiment, an example of performing an advantageous general end determination based on whether or not the advantageous general game number counter is subtracted for each game and has reached 0 (subtraction method) will be described. Is not limited to the subtraction method, for example, by adding 1 to the advantageous general game number counter for each game, and depending on whether or not the count value reaches a predetermined value (advantageous general number of games) (addition method) It may be. Similarly, for the end determination of each of CZ and AT, which will be described later, the subtraction method is exemplified in the present embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the end determination of each of CZ and AT may be performed by an addition method. . In the present embodiment, an example is described in which the advantageous period counter is decremented by 1 for each game, and the end of the advantageous period is determined based on whether or not the count value has reached 0. The determination is not limited to the subtraction method, for example, by adding 1 to the advantageous period counter for each game, and whether or not the count value has reached the upper limit value (upper limit value 1500 of the advantageous period) (addition method) The end of the advantageous period may be determined.

  In the advantageous period setting process in the advantageous general, it is determined whether or not the CZ transition lottery condition or the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied in the current game. When a predetermined CZ transition lottery condition is established in this game, a CZ transition lottery is executed to determine whether or not to control to CZ and the number of games that can be controlled to CZ (that is, the advantage of CZ).

  The CZ transition lottery is performed with reference to a predetermined CZ transition lottery table stored in the ROM 67. The CZ transition lottery table is determined such that the CZ transition lottery is performed according to a ratio according to the established CZ transition lottery condition. For example, when the CZ transition lottery condition is established by winning the “single winning combination”, it is determined to be “non-winning” at a rate of 10% and to be controlled to CZ at a rate of 90%. Further, when controlling to CZ, the number of games that can be controlled to CZ is determined. The number of games that can be controlled by CZ is determined by lottery, for example, from the number of games from 0 to 750. Note that the number of games that can be controlled by the CZ is not limited to those determined from the number of games, and may be a predetermined number.

  When the decision to control to CZ is made, in the advantageous period setting process, the number of games determined by the CZ transition lottery after digesting the number of games (for example, 3 times) for executing a predetermined effect (for example, continuous effect) Is set in the CZ game number counter and the CZ flag is set. The advantageous general game number counter and the advantageous general flag are reset. Thereby, as shown in FIG.8 (b), it controls to CZ of an advantageous period.

  The CZ transfer lottery is performed collectively using the extracted values extracted for the role lottery (hereinafter also referred to as a batch lottery method). For example, with respect to the determination value for winning the “single winning combination”, the determination value is determined so as to have the above-described distribution ratio, and an advantageous period shift lottery is performed depending on which one the extracted value belongs to. The advantageous period shift lottery is performed at the end of one game. However, the lottery is not limited to this, and may be performed in a lump in the role lottery in the internal lottery process. Note that the CZ transfer lottery is not limited to the collective lottery method as long as it is performed according to the result of the role lottery. It may be extracted and a CZ transition lottery is performed using the random number.

  When the advantageous general game number counter is set to “0” and the determined number of games is exhausted without being determined to be CZ by the CZ transition lottery, the CZ non-winning effect indicating that the CZ is not won in the advantageous period setting process. A CZ non-winning notification process for performing a winning notification is performed. In the CZ non-winning notification process, for example, a process of driving and controlling the notification display 60 and the like so as to display “-” and a CZ non-winning command capable of specifying CZ non-winning are output to the sub-control board 73. In addition, a process for displaying a message such as “Sorry!” On the liquid crystal display 27 is included. Thereby, a player can be notified of CZ non-winning. In the advantageous period setting process, it is determined whether or not a condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied in CZ.

  If the CZ is not won and the condition for ending the advantageous general is satisfied, the advantageous general flag is erased in the advantageous period setting process to end the advantageous period and shift to the normal period as shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined to control to CZ in the CZ transition lottery during the general advantage, for example, a CZ winning command capable of specifying CZ winning is output to the sub-control board 73, and the background image on the liquid crystal display 27 is displayed. Switch to the background image corresponding to CZ. At the time of CZ winning, control is made to CZ from a predetermined CZ start timing (for example, after 3 games are digested when the continuous performance ends).

  In the advantageous period setting process in CZ, it is determined whether or not the AT transition lottery condition or the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied in the current game. When it is determined that the AT transition lottery condition is satisfied, an AT transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the AT according to the established AT transition lottery condition and the number of AT games that are controlled by the AT. Do. The AT shift lottery is performed with reference to a predetermined AT shift lottery table stored in the ROM 67. The AT transition lottery table is determined so that the AT transition lottery is performed according to the ratio according to the established AT transition lottery condition. For example, if the AT transition lottery condition is established by winning “one-player” in the CZ, it is determined to be “non-winning” at a rate of 10% and to be controlled by the AT at a rate of 90%. The Depending on which AT transition lottery condition is satisfied, the allocation rate and the like are set so that the ATs have different advantages (the AT winning probabilities are different).

  The AT transfer lottery is performed in a batch lottery manner, similar to the CZ transfer lottery. For example, with respect to the determination value for winning the “single winning combination”, the determination value is determined so as to have the above-described distribution ratio, and the AT shift lottery is performed depending on to which the extracted value belongs. The AT transfer lottery is performed at the end of one game, but is not limited to this, and may be performed in a lump in the role lottery in the internal lottery process. Note that the AT transfer lottery is not limited to the collective lottery method as long as it is performed according to the result of the role lottery. For example, when winning “single piece” in the role lottery, a random number for AT transfer lottery is separately added. It is also possible to extract and perform AT transfer lottery using the random number.

  When the CZ game number counter is set to “0” and the determined number of games is exhausted without being determined to be controlled by AT by the AT shift lottery, the AT non-winning effect indicating that the AT is not winning in the advantageous period setting process An AT non-winning notification process for notification is performed. In the AT non-winning notification process, for example, a process for driving and controlling the notification display 60 and the like so as to display “-” and an AT non-winning command capable of specifying AT non-winning are output to the sub-control board 73. Then, after finishing the battle effect that was being executed on the liquid crystal display 27, a process for executing the result notification effect of displaying a message such as “Sorry!” Is included. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player of AT non-winning. In the advantageous period setting process, it is determined whether or not a condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied in CZ. When the conditions for ending AT and CZ are satisfied, in the advantageous period setting process, the CZ flag is deleted and the advantageous period is ended and the normal period is started as shown in FIG. Even if the advantageous period is controlled, if the advantageous period ends without being controlled by the AT, the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is not lit, so that the advantageous period is not performed without performing the navigation effect. Even if the game ends, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the AT is controlled in the AT transition lottery during CZ, an AT winning notification process for performing AT winning notification that the AT is controlled is performed, and a predetermined AT start timing (e.g. From the game start timing) to AT. The AT winning notification process is, for example, a process of driving and controlling the notification display 60 or the like so as to display “77” or an AT winning command capable of specifying AT winning is output to the sub-control board 73 to display the liquid crystal display. After finishing the battle effect performed in the device 27, a process for executing a result notification effect of displaying a message such as “AT winning” is included. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player of AT winning. The AT winning notification is performed when the number of CZ games is exhausted. For this reason, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that an AT is won until the number of CZ games is exhausted. When the AT winning notification is performed, the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is turned on.

  In the advantageous period setting process, when AT winning notification is performed, the number of AT games determined in the AT transition lottery is set in the remaining AT game number counter and the AT flag is set to control the AT. In the advantageous period setting process, the advantageous period counter is incremented by 1 every time one game is executed. Further, in the advantageous period setting process, after the AT winning notification is performed, the remaining AT game number counter is decremented by 1 every time one game is executed after the control to the AT is started.

  In the advantageous period setting process during the AT, when a predetermined extra lottery condition (for example, when “push order bell” is won, when “one-piece combination” is won, when “bonus 1” or “bonus 2” is won, etc.) In addition, an extra lottery for adding the number of AT games is performed. Also, in the advantageous period setting process during AT, when the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied, the AT flag is deleted, the advantageous period including AT is terminated, and the normal period is controlled. For example, as shown in FIG. 8B, the condition for ending the advantageous period during the AT is whether the remaining AT game number counter = 0, the advantageous period counter = 0, or the maximum number of cumulative numbers in the advantageous period. This is established when the current cumulative number from the base point exceeds 2400 with the lower value as the base point (0). When the condition for ending the advantageous period is established during AT and the normal period is reached, the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is turned off.

  In the advantageous period setting process, as a result of the setting by the gaming state setting process and the advantageous period setting process, which gaming state is the next and subsequent games, the advantageous general (advantageous general game number counter) in the normal period and the advantageous period. ), CZ in the advantageous period (including the value of the CZ game number counter), AT in the advantageous period (including the value of the remaining AT game number counter), etc. Output possible status commands. As a result, on the sub-control board 73 side, it is possible to execute effects according to the state after the next time. When the advantageous period setting process ends, the process proceeds to the betting number setting process of S100 to prepare for the next game. The slot machine 1 repeatedly executes the processes of S100 to S700 for each game. Further, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not an error has occurred in the slot machine 1, and outputs an error command that can specify the type of error when it is determined that an error has occurred.

  Here, the process executed during the AT among the advantageous period related processes in S300 of FIG. 5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining an example of the during-AT process executed during the AT among the advantageous period-related processes. When the AT flag is set, the main CPU 61 executes a process during AT among the advantageous period related processes.

  In SA01, 1 is subtracted from the value of the advantageous period counter. As described above, the advantageous period counter is a counter for specifying an upper limit period that can be controlled within a predetermined advantageous period. FIG. 9 shows the update process of the advantageous period counter during the AT in which the AT flag is set, but from the start to the end of the advantageous period, that is, only during the AT in which the AT flag is set. Also, during the advantageous general, CZ, during the RBB won during the advantageous period, and after the end of the RBB until the transition to “advantaged RT” again, the advantageous period counter value is set for each game. A process for subtracting 1 is executed.

  In SA02, 1 is subtracted from the value of the remaining AT game number counter. The value of the remaining AT game number counter is decremented by 1 for each game in the AT for which the AT flag is set. Even if a game is played during the period up to the transition to, it is not updated. Note that the subtraction method is not limited to those shown in SA01 and SA02. For example, the remaining AT game number counter and the advantageous period counter are incremented by 1 for each game, and the count value is a predetermined value (the number of acquired AT games, (1500) may be performed (addition method).

  In SA03, it is determined whether or not a predetermined extra lottery condition is satisfied. When it is not determined that the predetermined extra lottery condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to SA07. On the other hand, when it is determined that a predetermined extra lottery condition is satisfied, an extra lottery process is executed in SA04. The extra lottery process in SA04 is executed when the extra lottery condition is satisfied regardless of the value of the advantageous period counter updated in SA01 or SA02 and the value of the remaining AT game number counter. For this reason, even if the number of games for which the value of the remaining AT game number counter is equal to or greater than the value of the advantageous period counter is added, it is not necessary to perform a determination process such as whether or not a situation in which a profit cannot be substantially granted. Further, when the extra lottery condition is satisfied, the extra lottery process is executed uniformly, so that the processing load can be prevented from increasing.

  The extra lottery process is performed with reference to the extra lottery table shown in FIG. The extra lottery table is stored in the ROM 67. The extra lottery table is determined so that the extra lottery is performed according to a ratio corresponding to the established extra lottery condition. As an additional lottery condition, push-bell winning, one-piece winning, and bonus winning are set.

  When the lottery condition is met by adding the push-order bell, 95% is added and non-winning, but the remaining 5% is either “10”, “20”, “50”, or “100” at the rate shown in FIG. Is determined as the number of additional games, which is the number of AT games to be added. When the lottery condition is met by adding a single winning combination, the player is not added by 30%, but any one of “10” to “150” is added at the rate shown in FIG. 10 out of the remaining 70%. To be determined. In addition, when the bonus lottery condition is established by the bonus combination winning, it is always the extra winning, and any one of “10” to “150” is determined as the number of additional games at the ratio shown in FIG. In this way, since the ratio of winning and winning is different depending on the type of added lottery conditions established, and the ratio determined as the number of additional games is large, the player should pay attention to which additional lottery conditions are met. Can do.

  The extra lottery is performed collectively using the extracted values extracted for the role lottery (batch lottery method). For example, with respect to the determination value for winning the “single winning combination”, the determination value is determined so as to be a distribution ratio corresponding to the “single winning combination” shown in FIG. Add the lottery. The extra lottery is performed at the end of one game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be performed in a lump in the case of a winning lottery in the internal lottery process. Note that the extra lottery is not limited to the collective lottery system as long as it is performed according to the result of the winning lottery. For example, when winning “one-piece winning” in the winning lottery, a random number for extra lottery is separately extracted. In addition, an additional lottery may be performed using the random number.

  Returning to FIG. 9, in SA05, it is determined whether or not an extra lottery is made in the extra lottery. If it is not determined that the winning combination is won, the process proceeds to SA07. On the other hand, when it is determined that the extra game is won, the value of the additional game number determined in the extra lottery is added to the current value of the remaining AT game number counter in SA06. As a result, the value of the remaining AT game number counter increases by the number of additional games. In SA07, an additional game number command that can specify the added AT game number is output and set. If no extra game has been added, an extra game number command that can specify “0” is output and set.

  In SA08, a remaining AT game number command that is the value of the remaining AT game number counter and can specify the remaining AT game number is output and set. As a result of the extra lottery process in SA04, when the number of AT games is added in SA06, a remaining AT game number command that can specify the number of remaining AT games after the addition is output and set. In SA09, the remaining upper limit number-of-games command which can specify the remaining upper limit number of games up to the upper limit number of advantageous periods is output and set, and the AT process ends. By outputting a command through SA08 and SA09, the number of remaining AT games during the AT and the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of advantageous periods can be specified on the sub-control board 73 side. On the side of the sub control board 73, a predetermined effect is executed based on a command output from the main control board 63 exemplified by SA07, SA08, and SA09.

  Next, processing executed during the advantageous period in the advantageous period setting process of S700 of FIG. 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of the cumulative number counter process for updating the cumulative number counter for specifying the cumulative number among the processes executed during the advantageous period in the advantageous period setting process. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining an example of the end determination process for determining the end of the advantageous period among the processes executed during the advantageous period in the advantageous period setting process. In the advantageous period setting process during the advantageous period, the main CPU 61 executes a cumulative number counter process, and then executes an end determination process as a subsequent process.

  In the cumulative number counter process, first, in SA11, it is determined whether or not a re-game player has been won in the current game (game ended this time). When it is determined that one of the re-game players has been won, the process proceeds to SA13. When it is determined that none of the re-game players has won, the number of medals paid out in the current game (or credits added) is added to the cumulative number counter in SA12. For example, when winning a small combination, the number of payouts corresponding to the small combination is added, and when not winning a small combination, the number of payouts is “0”, and the addition is not updated. As a result, the cumulative number counter is not updated when a small role is not won in this game (including when a re-game role is won or a bonus role is won). The number of payouts corresponding to the combination is updated in the cumulative number counter.

  In SA13, it is determined whether or not any of the re-game players has been won in the previous game (the game immediately before the game ended this time). That is, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game that accompanies a re-game player win. When it is determined in SA13 that the game was played by winning one of the re-game players in the previous game, the process proceeds to SA15. On the other hand, in SA13, none of the re-game players have won in the previous game, and it is determined that the current game is a game in which the bet number is set using the medal (including credits) owned by the player. When this is done, in SA14, the bet number (inserted number) set for the current game is subtracted from the cumulative number counter. For example, when “3” is set as the bet number using the medal or credit owned by the player and the current game is being played, “3” is subtracted from the value of the cumulative number counter. As a result, when the current game is a game that accompanies a re-gamer winning, the cumulative number counter is not updated, and the game is performed with the bet number set by the insertion operation (maximum bet switch operation, medal insertion, etc.). The bet amount is subtracted from the cumulative number counter and updated.

  FIG. 11 shows an example in which the addition process in SA12 or the subtraction process in SA14 is not performed when the winning of the re-gamer is determined in SA11 and SA13. However, without performing SA11 and SA13, for example, when a re-game player is won in SA12 and SA14, addition processing for adding 0 or subtraction processing for subtracting 0 is performed (that is, addition processing or subtraction processing is performed). However, the value of the cumulative number counter is not substantially updated). Even when the addition process at SA12 or the subtraction process at SA14 is not performed, the addition process for adding 0 or the subtraction process for subtracting 0 is performed when winning a re-game player at SA12 and SA14. Even if it exists, the determination process in SA22 in FIG.

  In SA15, it is determined whether or not the value of the cumulative number counter is 0 or less. When it is not determined that the value of the cumulative number counter is 0 or less, the cumulative number counter value is a positive value and is not the lowest value at which the current cumulative number in the advantageous period is the lowest. The counter process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the cumulative number counter is 0 or less, the value of the cumulative number counter is 0 or a negative value, and the current cumulative number is the lowest value in the current advantageous period. In step SA16, the cumulative number counter is cleared (set to 0). Thereby, every time the cumulative number in the advantageous period becomes the lowest value, it is cleared to zero, and the number of medals increased from that point in time can be specified from the cumulative number thereafter, based on the cumulative number at that point in time. In SA15, it is not limited to determining whether or not the value of the cumulative number counter is 0 or less, and it is determined whether or not the value of the cumulative number counter is less than 0 (negative value). You may do it. In SA17, a cumulative number command that can specify the current cumulative number counter value is output and set, and the cumulative number counter process is terminated. By outputting the cumulative number command, the cumulative number can be specified on the sub-control board 73 side. On the sub-control board 73 side, a predetermined effect can be executed based on the specified total number.

  Next, the end determination process will be described. In the end determination process, first, in SA21, it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous period counter is zero. The value of the advantageous period counter is decremented by 1 every time a game is played in the advantageous period, as described in SA01 of FIG. In SA21, as a result of the subtraction, the value of the advantageous period becomes 0, and it is determined whether or not the upper limit of the advantageous period has been reached in this game, that is, the success or failure of the first condition among the conditions for ending the advantageous period. . When it is determined in SA21 that the value of the advantageous period counter is 0, the process proceeds to SA26 because the first condition is satisfied.

  On the other hand, when it is not determined in SA21 that the value of the advantageous period counter is 0, it is determined in SA22 whether or not the value of the cumulative number counter has reached 2400. The value of the cumulative number counter is updated in the cumulative number counter process shown in FIG. In SA22, as a result of the update, the value of the cumulative number counter reaches 2400, and whether or not the upper limit of the advantageous period has been reached in this game, that is, the success or failure of the second condition among the conditions for ending the advantageous period Determine. Note that the second condition may be a condition that is satisfied when the value of the cumulative number counter exceeds 2400. In this case, in SA22, it is determined whether or not the value of the cumulative number counter> 2400. You may make it do. When it is determined in SA22 that the value of the cumulative number counter is 2400 or more, the process proceeds to SA26 because the second condition is satisfied.

  If it is not determined in SA22 that the value of the cumulative number counter is 2400 or more, it is determined in SA23 whether the AT is in the advantageous period. Note that the determination of SA22 is executed even when, for example, SA12 and SA14 in FIG. 11 are not performed, that is, when YES is determined in SA11 or SA13 in FIG. For this reason, the processing can be made common regardless of the winning of the re-gamer. If it is determined in SA23 that the AT is being performed, it is determined in SA24 whether or not the value of the remaining AT game number counter is 0. The value of the remaining AT game number counter is decremented by 1 every time a game is played during AT, as described in SA02 of FIG. When it is determined in SA24 that the value of the remaining AT game number counter is 0, the process proceeds to SA26 because the fifth condition is satisfied.

  On the other hand, when it is not determined in AT23 that the vehicle is in the AT state, the process proceeds to SA25, and among the conditions for ending the advantageous period, the third condition that can be satisfied during the general advantage or the first condition that can be satisfied during the CZ. It is determined whether condition 4 is satisfied. If it is not determined in SA25 that both the third condition and the fourth condition are satisfied, the condition for ending the advantageous period is not satisfied, and thus the end determination process ends. Thereby, control to an advantageous period is continued.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in SA25 that either the third condition or the fourth condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to SA26. In SA26, an advantageous period end process for ending the advantageous period is performed, and the end determination process is ended. In the advantageous period end process, various counters related to the advantageous period (including advantageous period counter, cumulative number counter, etc.) and various flags (including AT flag, CZ flag, etc.) are updated according to the progress of the game during the advantageous period. At the same time, the game data used for the progress of the game is initialized. Further, in the advantageous period end process, a command that can specify the game data immediately before the initialization is output and set. Thus, the advantageous period can be ended and the game data in the ended advantageous period can be prevented from being taken over by the game control by the main CPU 61 thereafter. On the sub-control board 73 side, it is possible to specify various game data during the advantageous period and reflect them in various effects.

<Production control processing>
The sub CPU 71 executes an effect control program stored in the ROM 77 on the basis of a command from the main control board 63, and performs an effect lottery that determines the presence / absence and type of the effect execution according to the progress of the game by a random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, an effect control process is performed to drive and control effect means such as the liquid crystal display 27, speakers 31L and 31R, and various lamps / LEDs connected to the sub-control board 73. Examples of effects executed by the effect control process will be described below.

(Directions related to the winning group)
In the effect control process, when a winning type command that can identify the type of the winning combination group won in the winning lottery is received, an effect according to the type of the winning combination group can be executed. The effect control process is based on the reception of the winning type command, for example, when the winning type command of “RBB” is received, such as an effect of displaying a confirmation screen including “bonus fixed!” On the liquid crystal display 27, “ An effect of displaying an image of a “yellow balloon” similar in color to the bell on the liquid crystal display 27 based on a winning type command that can specify “push order bell” is executed. Thereby, the player can advance the game while guessing the winning combination group, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the effect control process, when an advantageous operation mode command capable of specifying an advantageous operation mode is received during AT, an effect of displaying an image capable of specifying the advantageous operation mode specified from the command on the liquid crystal display 27 is provided. Execute. This makes it possible to stop the correct answer procedure and win “BEL” with certainty when one of the “left correct answer bell 1” to “right correct answer bell 4” is won during AT. In addition, during ART that is “advantageous RT” and AT, “BEL” can be won even if any of “Left correct answer bell 1” to “Right correct answer bell 4” is won. It is possible to reliably prevent the eyes from stopping and falling to “normal RT”. In addition, the image which can identify an advantageous operation mode is also called a navigation effect.

(Directions related to various conditions)
As described above, in the advantageous period related processing of S300, the predetermined advantageous period transition condition, the predetermined CZ transition lottery condition, the predetermined AT transition lottery condition, the predetermined additional lottery condition, and the condition for ending the advantageous period are satisfied. A condition-related command is output to the sub-control board 73 when the situation is obtained.

  In the effect control process, a chance button effect or a continuous effect can be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Predetermined conditions include, for example, benefits that are advantageous to the player such as CZ transition lottery conditions being satisfied, AT transition lottery conditions being satisfied, additional lottery conditions being satisfied, and winning a bonus or single piece This is established when there is a possibility that is given (control to CZ or AT, addition control, control to bonus, etc.).

  The chance button effect is an effect of displaying a message image such as “PUSH” for prompting an operation to the determination switch 81a or an image imitating the determination switch 81a on the liquid crystal display 27 or the like. As a chance button effect pattern, a normal pattern in which a message image such as “PUSH” is displayed in a normal mode (for example, white), and a special pattern in which a message image such as “PUSH” is displayed in a special mode (for example, hatched) Including.

  In the effect control process, the operation corresponding effect is executed by operating the decision switch 81a during the chance button effect. For the operation-related effects, for example, a winning announcement effect for notifying whether or not CZ, AT, bonus, etc. are won (whether or not a privilege is given) and CZ, AT, bonus, etc. are won. And a winning suggestion effect that suggests the possibility (possibility that a privilege is granted). In addition, the winning suggestion effect is not limited to this, as long as it does not notify whether or not it is won (whether or not a privilege is given), and the player has a sense of expectation for winning. It may be an effect that sings. In addition, the continuous effect is whether or not a CZ, AT, bonus, etc. are won as a result of the effect after executing a predetermined effect over a plurality of games (whether or not a privilege is given). It is an effect to notify. The chance button effect can be executed according to the progress of the effect during the continuous effect, and can be executed alone (separately from the continuous effect).

  In the effect control process, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a lottery for determining whether or not to execute the chance button effect and a lottery for determining whether or not to execute the continuous effect are performed. When it is determined to execute the chance button effect, the pattern of the chance button effect to be executed is determined. When it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed, the pattern of the continuous effect to be executed is determined. When it is determined that the chance button effect is executed and the continuous effect is executed, a continuous effect pattern to be executed is determined from patterns in which the chance button effect is included during the continuous effect.

  The chance button effect is an effect that prompts an operation to the determination switch 81a as described above. For this reason, for example, if the chance button effect is executed during the subsequent stop operation after the first stop operation, the stop operation with a good rhythm is hindered, and the flow of the game is divided. There is a risk that. In addition, if the chance button effect is executed while the number of bets has been set but the start operation has not yet been performed and the game start has not been confirmed, the player determines whether or not the chance button effect is executed. There is a possibility that it can be recognized and used to determine whether or not to start the game. In this embodiment, the timing for starting the chance button effect is limited to a predetermined timing during the game so as not to cause such a problem.

  FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a timing at which a chance button effect can be started. In FIG. 13, the start switch 19 is operated after the betting number is set by inserting medals or the bet switch operation, and the rotation of the reels 11L to 11R is started, and the reels 11L to 11L are operated in response to the operation to the stop switches 21L to 21R. Whether the chance button effect can be started or not can be started according to the degree of progress of the game until the rotation of each 11R stops.

  In FIG. 13, the Nth game and the (N + 1) th game are shown in the number-of-games column. For each game, the period from when the bet number is set until the start switch 19 is operated is “BET”. The period from when the start switch 19 is operated (ON detection) to the rotation of the reels 11L to 11R until the first stop operation is detected as “START” is indicated as “START”, and the first stop operation is turned on. The detected period is indicated as “1ST” and “ON”, the period in which the detection is turned OFF after the first stop operation is detected as ON is indicated as “1ST” and “OFF”, and the second stop operation and Each of the third stop operations is shown in the same manner as the first stop operation.

  In such a game flow, as a period during which the chance button effect can be started, as illustrated in correspondence with the flow of the number of games “N”, the period indicated as “START”, and the third stop operation is ON. A period from when the bet is detected until the bet amount is set is determined. On the other hand, as a period during which the chance button effect cannot be started, a period indicated as “BET” and a period from when the first stop operation is detected to ON until the third stop operation is detected to be ON are determined. . As shown in Example 1 and Example 2 in FIG. 13, the chance button effect is started in a period indicated as “START” and a period from when the third stop operation is detected to when the bet amount is set, Once started, it can be continuously executed at the timing after the period has elapsed. As a result, as shown in the flow of the number of games “N + 1”, when the chance button effect is started, for example, in a period indicated as “START”, the game is continuously executed even after the first stop operation is detected to be ON. The On the other hand, as shown in Example 3 and Example 4 in FIG. 13, the chance button effect is a period indicated by “BET” and a period from when the first stop operation is detected to ON until the third stop operation is detected to be ON. It becomes impossible to start.

  Next, a specific example of the chance button effect will be described. FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining a display example of the liquid crystal display 27 when the chance button effect is executed. FIG. 14 shows a display example when the CZ transition lottery condition is satisfied in the general advantageous period. In FIG. 14, a display example of the liquid crystal display 27 is mainly described. In the chance button effect, various lamps are controlled in a manner corresponding to the display on the liquid crystal display 27, and a predetermined sound effect or BGM is displayed on the speaker. It is assumed that the signals are output from 31L and 31R. Hereinafter, an example in which the chance button effect is started when the start switch 19 is operated and ON detection is performed or when the third stop operation is detected ON will be described. The production is not limited to this as long as it is started in the period indicated as “START” or the period from when the third stop operation is detected to the time when the bet amount is set.

  In the advantageous general period of the advantageous period, a background image reminiscent of daytime is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 as shown in FIG. In the upper left area of the liquid crystal display 27, a message such as “daytime stage” is displayed, and in the lower left area, a state where the character A reminiscent of a frog is taking a walk is displayed.

  FIG. 14B shows a display example when the chance button effect of the normal pattern is executed when the start switch 19 is operated (ON detection) corresponding to the establishment of the CZ transition lottery condition. The chance button effect can be started even when the start switch 19 is detected OFF when the start switch 19 is detected ON. The chance button effect is executed by displaying a message image such as “PUSH” or an image imitating the decision switch 81a in the central area of the liquid crystal display 27 in a layer having a higher priority than the background image.

  FIG. 14C shows a display example when an operation corresponding effect is executed in response to the operation of the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 during the chance button effect. FIG. 14C shows a display example when a winning suggestion effect is executed as the operation-corresponding effect. The winning suggestion effect as the operation corresponding effect is executed by cutting in the character B image together with a message “CHANCE” in the central area of the liquid crystal display 27 in a layer having a higher priority than the background image. Thereby, it can be suggested to the player that there is a possibility that CZ, AT, bonus, etc. are won (a privilege may be given).

  FIG. 14D shows an example in which a background image reminiscent of daytime in an advantageous period is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 as in FIG. 14A. FIG. 14E shows a display example when a special pattern chance button effect is executed when the third stop operation is detected to be ON, corresponding to the establishment of the CZ transition lottery condition. The chance button effect can be started even when the third stop operation is detected to be OFF when the third stop operation is detected to be ON. The chance button effect of the special pattern is also executed in a layer having a higher priority than the background image.

  FIG. 14F shows a display example when an operation corresponding effect is executed in response to the operation of the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 during the chance button effect. FIG. 14F shows a display example when a winning notification effect is executed as an operation-compatible effect. The winning notification effect as the operation corresponding effect is executed by cutting in a message such as “Congratulations on WIN” in the central area of the liquid crystal display 27 in a layer having a higher priority than the background image. Thereby, it is possible to definitely notify the player that CZ, AT, bonus, etc. have been won (given a privilege).

  In the effect control process, as shown in FIGS. 14B and 14E, when the chance button effect is executed, the LED mounted on the operation unit of the determination switch 81a to be operated is lit. Do. At this time, regardless of the controlled mode, the LED mounted on the operation unit of the determination switch 81a is controlled with a predetermined power consumption. That is, even when the eco mode is controlled, the LED mounted on the operation unit of the determination switch 81a is controlled with the same power consumption as that in the normal mode. For this reason, regardless of the controlled mode, the operation part of the decision switch 81a can be lit with high brightness, and the operation target can be made conspicuous.

  The chance button effect is displayed in the central area of the liquid crystal display 27 as shown in FIGS. 14 (b) and 14 (e). On the other hand, the effect that is displayed in the standby state and is guided to the player menu is a smaller image than the chance button effect shown in FIGS. 14 (b) and 14 (e). Therefore, the image is displayed in the display area near the edge of the liquid crystal display 27. FIG. 14G shows a display example when the guidance effect is executed on the demonstration screen displayed in the standby state. In FIG. 14G, the guidance effect is executed in an image smaller than the chance button effect image in the lower left display area of the liquid crystal display 27. Further, on the right side of the guidance effect, for example, a message image such as “menu display by operation of the decision switch” is displayed, and the function explanation of the guidance effect is performed.

  FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining a table that is referred to when a chance button effect pattern is drawn by lottery. In the effect control process, when a predetermined condition is established and it is determined to execute the chance button effect, a lottery process for drawing a chance button effect pattern to be executed is executed. In the lottery process for drawing the chance button effect pattern, FIG. 15 is displayed when the CZ transition lottery, the AT transition lottery, and the extra lottery are won or when a bonus is won (when a bonus is awarded). Referring to the winning table shown in FIG. 15A, when the CZ transition lottery, the AT transition lottery, and the extra lottery are not won and the bonus is not won (when no bonus is given), FIG. Refer to the non-winning table shown in (b).

  In the chance button effect pattern, winning patterns 1 to 8 (FIG. 15A) selected when a privilege is granted and non-winning patterns 1 to 8 selected when a privilege is not granted (FIG. 15). (B)). Further, as shown in FIG. 14, the chance button effect pattern includes a normal pattern (patterns 1 to 4) that is a normal mode and a special pattern (patterns 5 to 8) that is a special mode. In addition, the chance button effect pattern is a pattern (patterns 3, 4, 7, and 8) that performs a winning notification effect as an operation corresponding effect that is executed in response to the operation of the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81. And patterns (patterns 1, 2, 5, and 6) for performing the winning suggestion effect. Further, the chance button effect pattern includes a pattern (patterns 1, 3, 5, and 7) that starts the chance button effect when the start switch 19 is detected ON, and the third stop operation that is detected ON. And patterns (patterns 2, 4, 6, 8) for starting the chance button effect are included.

  For example, when the winning pattern 1 is determined, the chance button effect in the normal mode is started when the start ON is detected, and the winning suggestion effect is performed as the operation corresponding effect. When the winning pattern 8 is determined, a special mode chance button effect is started when the third stop operation ON is detected, and a winning notification effect is performed as an operation corresponding effect. When the non-winning pattern 3 is determined, the chance button effect in the normal mode is started when the start ON is detected, and the winning suggestion effect is performed as the operation corresponding effect. When the non-winning pattern 7 is determined, a special chance button effect is started when the start operation ON is detected, and a winning notification effect is performed as an operation-corresponding effect.

  In the lottery process referring to the winning time table shown in FIG. 15 (a) and the non-winning time table shown in FIG. 15 (b), according to the distribution rate shown in FIG. This pattern is decided. For this reason, it can be said that there exist the following advantageous effects.

  First, when the CZ transition lottery, the AT transition lottery, and the extra lottery are won, or when bonuses are awarded (the winning time table in FIG. 15A), the CZ It is determined to be a special pattern that becomes a special mode as a mode of chance button effect at a higher rate than when the bonus is not given in the transition lottery or the like (no winning table in FIG. 15B). For this reason, when the chance button effect is started in a special mode, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation for the provision of a privilege.

  In addition, the rate at which the winning notification effect is executed as the operation-corresponding effect is when the third stop operation ON is detected as the start timing of the chance button effect rather than the pattern when the start ON is detected (for example, the winning pattern 3). The pattern (for example, winning pattern 4) is higher. For this reason, when the chance button effect is started when the third stop operation ON is detected, the expectation that the winning notification effect is executed as the operation corresponding effect is higher than when the chance button effect is started when the start stop is detected. Can do. In addition, when the start-on is detected, the expectation that the privilege is given is increased, and it becomes easy to maintain the expectation that the privilege is given until the third stop operation is detected. Can be improved.

  Further, the ratio at which the chance button effect of the pattern that executes the winning suggestion effect as the operation corresponding effect is started when the start ON is detected (for example, the distribution ratio of the winning pattern 1) is the pattern that executes the winning notification effect as the operation corresponding effect. The chance button effect is determined to be higher than the ratio (for example, the distribution ratio of the winning pattern 4) started when the third stop operation ON is detected. For this reason, since the chance button effect of the pattern in which the winning suggestion effect is executed can be provided when the start ON is detected to increase the expectation, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the chance button effect in the special mode is more effective when the third stop operation is detected (for example, the total allocation of the winning patterns 6 and 8 than when the start ON is detected (for example, the total allocation ratio of the winning patterns 5 and 7). Rate) is high. On the other hand, the chance button effect in the normal mode is when the start ON is detected (for example, the total allocation of the winning patterns 1 and 3) than when the third stop operation ON is detected (for example, the total allocation ratio of the winning patterns 2 and 4). Rate) is high. Therefore, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation that the chance button effect is started in a special manner when the third stop operation ON is detected after the start ON is detected.

  13 to 15, the example in which the chance button effect is executed alone has been described. However, as described above, when it is determined to execute the chance button effect and the continuous effect, the pattern of the continuous effect to be executed is determined from the patterns in which the chance button effect is included during the continuous effect. Even in the case of a continuous effect pattern in which a chance button effect is included, as shown in FIG. 13, the chance button effect has a period from the start ON detection to the first stop operation ON detection and the third stop operation. It is incorporated so as to be executed in the period from when the ON is detected to when the betting amount is set. For example, the chance button effect is included in the continuous effect so as to start when the start ON is detected or when the third stop operation ON is detected. Further, the appearance rate of the chance button effect during the continuous effect is included in the continuous effect so as to produce the advantageous effect shown in FIG. The image corresponding to the chance button effect during the continuous effect is displayed in a layer having a higher priority than the background image and having a higher priority than the continuous effect.

  With reference to FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, a display example, display timing, and the like on the liquid crystal display 27 when a continuous effect of a pattern including a chance button effect is executed will be specifically described. FIGS. 16 and 17 mainly describe display examples of the liquid crystal display 27. During the continuous production, various lamps are controlled in a manner corresponding to the display on the liquid crystal display 27, and a predetermined sound effect is obtained. And BGM are output from the speakers 31L and 31R.

  FIG. 16 shows a chance button effect corresponding to a winning pattern 1 or a non-winning pattern 1 when a start-on is detected in the third game among the continuous effects executed over three games (three games). And a diagram for explaining a display example of a continuous effect that is determined to execute the chance button effect corresponding to the winning pattern 4 or the non-winning pattern 4 when the third stop operation ON is detected in the third game. It is. “1G”, “2G” and “3G” in FIG. 16 correspond to the first game, the second game, and the third game, and the subsequent numbers “1”, “2”, etc. Assume that it corresponds to the timing in the game.

  The continuous performance starts when the 1G bet number is set. In the 1G, the title of the continuous performance is displayed. As shown in FIG. 16A, a character A imitating a frog is displayed in the central area of the liquid crystal display 27, and an achievement condition above the character A is “Use stars to shine stars!” A message is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that an effect having a story development relating to whether or not the star can be shined is executed. Further, below the achievement condition, it is indicated that the expected value of the continuous production to be started is two stars, and further, below the character A, a message for enlivening the production such as “Ike! (Serif) is displayed. The effect shown in FIG. 16A is performed after the third stop operation at the 1G is performed until the 2G bet number is set.

  When the 2G bet number is set, the effect shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 16B, four star frames are displayed above the character A. Subsequently, when the start switch 19 is operated in the 2nd eye, as shown in FIG. 16 (c), the two star frames from the left vibrate up and down, left and right, and when a predetermined time has elapsed, FIG. 16 (d) As shown in Fig. 2, the effect of shining two stars is performed. Further, in FIG. 16D, it is notified that the effect continues in the subsequent game by displaying “NEXT”. In the effects shown in FIGS. 16C to 16D, after the start switch 19 is operated in the 2G, the third stop operation is performed in the 2G, and then the 3G betting number is set. Is done.

  When the 3G bet number is set, the effect is switched to the effect shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 16E, an effect is produced in which one of the remaining two star frames vibrates up, down, left and right. Thereby, the expectation that one of the remaining two star frames shines can be raised, and the interest of the game can be improved. The effect shown in FIG. 16E is performed until the start operation at the 3G is detected after the 3G bet number is set.

  When the start operation is detected to be ON at the 3G, as shown in FIG. 16 (f), one of the remaining two star frames shines and a chance button effect is started. FIG. 16G shows a display example in which the decision switch 81a is operated in accordance with the chance button effect, and the winning suggestion effect is executed as the operation corresponding effect. In FIG. 16G, a message such as “chance” is cut-in displayed in the center area of the liquid crystal display 27 as a winning suggestion effect. Thereby, the expectation with respect to a privilege being provided can be improved.

  FIG. 16H illustrates a display example when the first stop operation is detected to be ON in the 3G. There is an effect that the remaining star frame vibrates up and down, left and right, and a message such as “OK!” Is displayed. The effect that the remaining one star frame vibrates up, down, left and right may start when the first stop operation is detected ON in the 3G, and is determined according to the chance button effect. It may be started by operating the switch 81a.

  FIG. 16I shows a display example when the third stop operation is detected to be ON in the 3G. As shown in FIG. 16 (i), the effect that the remaining one star frame vibrates up, down, left and right continues and when the third stop operation is detected to be ON at the 3G, the chance button effect is started. . When the determination switch 81a is operated in the display state of FIG. 16 (i), when a privilege is not given (during non-winning), the winning notification effect shown in FIG. 16 (j) is switched. As shown in FIG. 16 (j), the success notification effect is displayed by displaying a message such as “Sorry” or “Is this far ...” without the remaining one star shining and the character A facing backward. An effect to notify the end corresponding to the winning is performed. The effect shown in FIG. 16J is performed until the bet amount of the next game (4G) is set. When the 4G bet number is set, the continuous effect is ended and the screen shifts to a screen in which the continuous effect is not executed.

  In contrast, when the determination switch 81a is operated in the display state of FIG. 16 (i), when a privilege is given (during winning), the winning notification effect shown in FIG. 16 (k) is switched. . In FIG. 16, the case where RBB1 is won as a privilege is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 16 (k), the winning notification effect is displayed with the remaining one star shining and displaying a message “OK!”, And subsequently, as shown in FIG. 16 (m). By displaying messages such as “success” and “done!”, An effect of notifying the ending corresponding to the bonus winning is performed, and then the screen shifts to a bonus confirmation screen as shown in FIG. On the bonus confirmation screen, a message such as “bonus confirmation” is displayed in the upper area of the liquid crystal display 27, and a plurality of characters are displayed in the lower area of the liquid crystal display 27. It should be noted that the bonus confirmation screen shown in FIG. 16 (n) may be performed with the next game (4G). The bonus confirmation screen may be displayed, for example, when the number of bets for the 4G eye is set or when the start switch 19 for starting the reel rotation at the 4G eye is operated.

  Next, referring to FIG. 17, among the continuous effects executed over two games (two games), when start ON is detected in the second game, it corresponds to winning pattern 1 or non-winning pattern 1 Display example of a continuous effect that is determined to execute a chance button effect corresponding to the winning pattern 8 or the non-winning pattern 8 when the third stop operation ON is detected in the second game. Will be explained.

  The continuous performance starts when the 1G bet number is set. When the 1G bet number is set, the effects shown in FIGS. 17A to 17H are started. As shown in FIG. 17A, a message such as “Compete in competition!” Is displayed as an achievement condition in the upper area of the liquid crystal display 27, and below that, in the rival character C (FIG. 17A). A state in which the character placed on the upper side) and the character A on the player side (the character placed on the lower side in FIG. 17A) are located on the start line of the track is displayed, and a predetermined time has elapsed. When this is done, as shown in FIG. 17B, additional information on the achievement condition is displayed by switching to a message such as “Win the Kogael!”. Further, when a predetermined time elapses, messages such as “good” and “start” are displayed as shown in FIGS. Furthermore, after that, the effects shown in FIGS. 17E to 17H are switched. As shown in FIGS. 17E to 17H, the characters A and C are displayed jumping to the right side while competing together. The effects shown in FIGS. 17E to 17H are performed until the 2G start operation is detected after the 3G stop operation is performed in the 1G.

  When the 2G start operation is detected to be ON, as shown in FIG. 17 (i), a goal is displayed, a message such as “It's almost a goal!” Is displayed, and a chance button effect is started. The FIG. 17J shows a display example in which the decision switch 81a is operated in accordance with the chance button effect, and the winning suggestion effect is executed as the operation corresponding effect. In FIG. 17 (j), a message such as “Maybe a chance?” Is cut-in displayed in the center area of the liquid crystal display 27 as a winning suggestion effect. Thereby, the expectation with respect to a privilege being provided can be improved.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 17 (k), the final stage where the characters A and C compete is displayed. FIG. 17 (m) shows a display example when the second stop operation of the 2G is detected to be ON. As shown in FIG. 17 (m), the state of the final stage in which characters A and C are competing is continued, and when the third stop operation is detected ON in the 2G, a special mode chance button effect is started.

  By operating the determination switch 81a in the display state of FIG. 17 (m), when a privilege is granted (during winning), the winning notification effect shown in FIG. 17 (n) is switched. FIG. 17 illustrates a case where an AT is won as a privilege. As the winning notification effect, as shown in FIG. 17 (n), a state in which the character A finishes before the character C is displayed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 17 (o), while the character A is delighted while the character C is sitting backward, a message such as “Victory!” And “You did it!” Is displayed. Is displayed. When the 3G bet amount is set, the continuous effect is ended and the AT entry screen is displayed.

  On the other hand, by operating the determination switch 81a in the display state of FIG. 17 (m), when the special privilege is not given (during non-winning), the winning notification effect shown in FIG. 17 (p) is switched. . As the winning notification effect, as shown in FIG. 17 (p), a state in which the character C goals before the character A is displayed. Thereafter, in FIG. 17 (q), a state in which the character A is sitting backward while the character C is delighted is displayed. Then, when the 3G bet number is set, the continuous effect is ended and the screen shifts to a screen in which the continuous effect is not executed.

  Here, in the examples of the continuous effects in FIGS. 16 and 17, as illustrated in FIGS. 16 (j) and (k), FIGS. Although an example of executing the winning notification effect by switching to the effect part has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the determination switch 81a is operated in accordance with the chance button effects shown in FIG. 16 (i) or FIG. 17 (m), the winning notification effect is executed as an effect separate from the continuous effect, and then the continuous effect is performed. It is also possible to switch to the remaining part. Specifically, the final cut-in may be displayed as a winning announcement effect. When winning, a character such as “Victory!” Is cut-in displayed and when not winning. May be cut-in display of characters such as “It's a little more ...!”.

  In the effect control process, during AT, the background screen during AT is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display 27. On the background screen during the AT, the number of remaining AT games and the net increase in the AT are displayed. The number of remaining AT games refers to the value of the remaining AT game number counter for specifying the number of games informed that the AT can be controlled. Further, the net increase number refers to the number of medals obtained by subtracting the number of medals used for setting the bet number from the number of medals actually given in a predetermined net increase number calculation period. The net increase number calculation period is a period from the start of ART controlled by AT and controlled to advantageous RT until the end of the advantageous period (including CZ and AT) until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied. Say. In the following, processing and display examples related to the net increase number display will be described.

(Regarding the net increase number display)
The effect control process includes the processes shown in FIGS. 18 and 19 as the net increase number display process for displaying the net increase number during the AT. FIG. 18 is a flowchart for explaining the net increase number display process that is executed when one game is started after a bet amount is set (including an automatic BET by BET and re-gamer winning). FIG. 19 is a flowchart for explaining the net increase number display process executed when a medal is awarded. The sub CPU 71 executes the net increase number display process of FIG. 18 when receiving the bet command, and executes the net increase number display process of FIG. 19 when receiving the payout command. In the following, the pure increase number display process will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, in SB01, it is determined whether or not it is a net increase number calculation period. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a period from when the condition shown in FIG. 8B is satisfied until the advantageous period ends after the ART is controlled by the AT and the advantageous RT is started and the ART is started. The net increase number calculation period, once controlled to ART, is not terminated by, for example, RBB winning or RBB control, and continues until the condition shown in FIG. Whether or not it is the net increase number calculation period is specified based on, for example, a command output from the main CPU 61.

  If it is not determined in SB01 that it is the net increase number calculation period, the net increase number display process is terminated without displaying the net increase number. On the other hand, when it is determined in SB01 that it is the net increase number calculation period, it is determined in SB02 whether or not a re-game player has been won in the previous game (the game immediately before the game that ended this time). If it is determined in SB02 that the game was played by winning one of the re-game players in the previous game, the process proceeds to SB04. On the other hand, in SB02, none of the re-game players have won in the previous game, and it is determined that the current game is a game in which the bet number is set using the medal (including credits) owned by the player. If so, the number of bets (that is, the number of bets) is subtracted from the net increase in SB03. The net increase number is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 75 so as to be updatable. The bet number is specified based on a bet command output from the main CPU 61.

  In SB04, it is determined whether the confirmation screen is being displayed or the end telop is being displayed (end telop flag is being set). The confirmation screen is a screen for notifying that either RBB1 or RBB2 has been won, for example, a screen for displaying a message such as “Bonus confirmation!” On the liquid crystal display 27. When the sub CPU 71 receives a winning type command that can identify that “RBB” has been won, the sub CPU 71 determines how many times the game is to be displayed after displaying the confirmation screen (determining the display timing), and reaches the timing The confirmation screen is displayed when

  The end telop display means that the cumulative number specified from the cumulative number command reaches a predetermined cumulative number (for example, 2370) which is less than a predetermined number (for example, 30) up to 2400, which is the upper limit, or the advantageous period counter has an upper limit. The fact that the first condition or the second condition among the conditions for ending the advantageous period will soon be satisfied by reaching a numerical value (for example, 5) immediately before (0. It is a display which alert | reports. The end telop display displays a message on the liquid crystal display 27 according to a condition that will soon be established. The sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a timing to display the end telop based on a command for specifying the value of the cumulative number counter or the advantageous period counter, and displays the end telop when the timing is reached.

  When the confirmation screen or the end telop is displayed during the AT, the display of the net increase number is temporarily ended. When the confirmation screen is displayed, the display of the number of remaining AT games is once ended and the subtraction of the number of remaining AT games is also temporarily stopped. After the confirmation screen is displayed, the display of the net increase is resumed when the RBB is controlled, and during the preparation period such as the initial RT and the normal RT until the advantageous RT is controlled after the end of the RBB. Therefore, it is displayed updated. On the other hand, although the number of remaining AT games is displayed even during the preparation period after the end of the RBB, subtraction update display is not performed. Further, in order to allow the player to specify that the subtraction update display is not performed, the display portion or number of the net increase number may be grayed out, or the indication “HOLD” or the like may be superimposed on the display portion of the net increase number. During the preparation period, it is determined that the number of AT games will not be subtracted because the winning probability of the re-gamer is low and the number of medals owned by the player is reduced compared to when it is advantageous RT Because. The subtraction display of the number of remaining AT games is resumed after the preparatory period has elapsed and controlled to advantageous RT (ART). The display of the end telop is ended when the end telop flag is cleared when the cumulative number reaches 2400 which is the upper limit or the advantageous period ends when the advantageous period counter reaches 0 which is the upper limit. Note that when the display of the end telop is ended and the RBB started during the advantageous period is continuously controlled, the net increase in the RBB is continuously displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 18, when it is determined in SB04 that the confirmation screen is being displayed or the end telop is being displayed (when none is displayed), in SB05, the current state is either AT or RBB. It is determined whether or not. The AT includes not only during the ART but also during the AT + preparation state after the ART is once started. In SB05, when it is determined that the current state is AT or bonus, in SB06, the net increase number display on the liquid crystal display 27 is updated to the net increase number after subtraction in SB03.

  On the other hand, when it is determined at SB04 that the confirmation screen is being displayed or the end telop is being displayed, or when it is determined at SB05 that it is neither AT nor RBB, the net increase number display is not displayed at SB07. That is, control is performed so as not to display the net increase number. As a result, the net increase number is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 during the net increase number calculation period, neither the confirmation screen nor the end telop based on the cumulative number is displayed, and during AT or RBB. .

  Next, the net increase number display process of FIG. 19 will be described. In SB08, it is determined whether or not it is the net increase number calculation period. If it is determined that it is not the net increase number calculation period, the net increase number display process is terminated without displaying the net increase number. On the other hand, when it is determined in SB08 that it is the net increase number calculation period, it is determined in SB09 whether or not one of the re-game players has been won in the current game (game ended this time). When it is determined that one of the re-game players has been won, the process proceeds to SB11. When it is determined that none of the re-game players has won, the payout number is added to the net increase in SB10. The payout number is specified based on a payout command output from the main CPU 61. The net increase number in the net increase number calculation period is calculated by SB03 in FIG. 18 and SB10 in FIG.

  In SB11, it is determined whether or not the end telop flag is set. The end telop flag is a flag for displaying the end telop, and is set in SB13. When it is determined in SB11 that the end telop flag has been set, the end telop flag has already been set, so the net increase number display process is terminated without determining the cumulative number. When the end telop flag is set, the chance button effect may not be executed even at the timing when the chance button effect is executed, or the end telop flag is not used in the game in which the chance button effect is executed. May be set (when the cumulative number is, for example, a value that can set the end telop flag when the maximum payout number of one game is added), the chance button effect is not executed. May be.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined in SB11 that the end telop flag is set, it is determined in SB12 whether or not the cumulative number has reached 2370. The cumulative number is specified based on the cumulative number command from the main CPU 61. In SB12, it may be determined whether the cumulative number exceeds 2370 (cumulative number> 2370?). In SB12, a determination is made based on the same numerical value (that is, 2370) regardless of whether the RBB is in the RBB internal winning state during the AT or is in the RBB. When it is determined in SB12 that the cumulative number has reached 2370, the process proceeds to SB13.

  In SB13, an end telop flag for displaying the corresponding end telop is set. As the end telop when it is determined that the cumulative number has reached 2370, for example, a message such as “Soon, the upper limit of 2400 for the advantageous period will be reached” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. The display of the end telop is continued until the end telop flag is cleared at the end of the advantageous period, regardless of the cumulative number thereafter (for example, whether or not it falls below 2370). The display ends when finished. Even when the end telop flag is set, the end telop is not displayed during the RBB because an effect corresponding to the RBB, a net increase number display, and the like are performed. Further, the display mode of the end telop as a specific effect is not limited to such telop display, and the message may be displayed in subtitles (or scrolled), and the entire display area of the liquid crystal display 27 is used. May be displayed. In the present embodiment, the end telop is displayed when it is determined in SB12 that the cumulative number has reached 2370.

  In SB14, when the end telop is displayed when the cumulative number reaches 2370, the display of the net increase number during the net increase number calculation period is not displayed and the net increase number display process is ended. Thus, during the display of the end telop due to the cumulative number reaching 2370, control is performed so as not to display the net increase number during the net increase number calculation period. As a result, 2400 or more (the value obtained by adding the maximum payout number of one game to 2400) which is the upper limit of the cumulative number can be prevented from being displayed as a net increase number. In the present embodiment, the process for hiding the net increase in number is not executed when the cumulative number is determined to have reached 2370 in SB12, and the end telop flag is set in SB13. It can also be said that it is being executed when the end telop is set and displayed.

  In FIG. 19, the sub CPU 71 determines the cumulative number (SB12), and performs SB13 and SB14 when it is determined that the cumulative number has reached 2370, thereby displaying the end telop and calculating the net increase number. A display control command for instructing non-display of the net increase number during the period is output to the liquid crystal display 27, and the display control unit of the liquid crystal display 27 displays an end telop based on the display control command. In addition, an example in which the net increase number during the net increase number calculation period is not displayed has been described. However, for example, the sub CPU 71 outputs only the display control command for instructing the display of the end telop to the liquid crystal display 27 by performing SB13, so that the liquid crystal display is based on the display control command. The display control unit 27 displays the end telop and hides the net increase number during the net increase number calculation period in accordance with the display of the end telop (when it is determined to display the end telop). You may do it.

  Returning to SB12, if it is not determined that the cumulative number has reached 2370, the process proceeds to SB15. In SB15, it is determined whether or not the confirmation screen is being displayed. If it is not determined in SB15 that the confirmation screen is being displayed, it is determined in SB16 whether the current state is AT or RBB. The AT includes not only during the ART but also during the AT + preparation state after the ART is once started. If it is determined in SB16 that the current state is AT or RBB, it is determined in SB17 whether or not the net increase number has reached the set OVER display number.

  FIG. 20A is a diagram for explaining the OVER display number and the display mode of the OVER display. The OVER display number is a value determined in stages for every 500 sheets, such as 500, 1000, 1500, and 2000. During AT or bonus, the OVER display number to be aimed next is set among the OVER display numbers shown in FIG. 20 according to the net increase calculated by SB03 in FIG. 18 and SB10 in FIG. For example, when the net increase number does not reach 500, “500” is set as the OVER display number, and when the net increase number reaches 500 but does not reach 1000, “1000” is set as the OVER display number. The The OVER display number is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 75, and “500” is set as an initial value. Thereafter, the value of the next stage is set in SB21 described later.

  Returning to FIG. 19, when it is not determined in SB17 that the net increase number has reached the set OVER display number, the net increase number display on the liquid crystal display 27 is updated to the net increase number after addition in SB10 in SB22. To do. On the other hand, when it is determined at SB17 that the net increase number has reached the set OVER display number, the corresponding OVER display execution flag is set at SB18. The OVER display is a display for notifying that the calculated net increase number has reached the set OVER display number. The sub CPU 71 performs processing for executing OVER display on the liquid crystal display 27 when the execution flag is set. As shown in the display mode column of FIG. 20 (a), as the display data for OVER display, display data in the normal mode (red characters, etc.) is stored in ROM 77 up to “1500”. “2000”, which is a predetermined platform, stores display data in a rainbow form (rainbow characters or the like). Therefore, the OVER display up to “1500” is displayed in the normal mode, and the OVER display of “2000” is displayed in the rainbow mode. Even when it is determined in SB17 that the net increase number has reached the set OVER display number, when the chance button effect is being executed, the game does not proceed to SB18 and the corresponding OVER display is performed. The execution flag may not be set. In this case, when it is determined in SB17 that the net increase number has reached the set OVER display number and the chance button effect is not executed, the process proceeds to SB18 and the OVER display is executed. You may be made to do.

  In SB19, it is determined whether or not the reached OVER display number is the “2000” OVER display number. If it is not determined to be “2000”, the process proceeds to SB21. On the other hand, when it is determined to be “2000”, the rainbow flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 75 in SB20. The rainbow flag is a flag for displaying a display form of a predetermined effect such as a pure increase number display in a rainbow pattern. Predetermined effects such as the display of a pure increase in number are displayed in the normal mode (red characters, etc.) when the rainbow flag is not set, and in the rainbow mode (rainbow characters, etc.) when the rainbow flag is set. . Predetermined effects such as a purely increased number display include a purely increased number display and an end screen (also referred to as an ending effect) when an AT, bonus, or the like ends. As shown in FIG. 20B, the predetermined effect such as the display of the net increase number is displayed in a normal manner until the calculated net increase number reaches “2000”, and the calculated net increase number reaches “2000”. After that, it is displayed in a rainbow manner.

  In SB21, the OVER display number at the next stage is set with respect to the currently set OVER display number. For example, when the set OVER display number is “500”, “1000” is set as the OVER display number for the next stage, and when the set OVER display number is “1000”, “1500” is the next. This is set as the number of OVER displays at the stage. As described above, when it is determined that the calculated net increase number has reached the set OVER display number, the OVER display number in the next stage is set. For this reason, for example, after the OVER display of “500” is once displayed when the net increase number reaches “500”, the number of medals owned by the player decreases to less than “500” and then reaches “500” again. However, it is possible to prevent the OVER display of “500” from being determined again as “YES” in SB17.

  In SB22, the net increase number display on the liquid crystal display 27 is updated to the net increase number after addition in SB10. The ROM 77 stores display data for the normal mode and display data for the rainbow mode as display data for displaying the net increase. Therefore, in SB22, when the rainbow flag is not set, the net increase number display is updated using the display data for the normal mode, and when the rainbow flag is set, the net increase number display is displayed using the display data for the rainbow mode. Update.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the confirmation screen is being displayed in SB15, or when it is determined that neither AT nor RBB is in SB16, the net increase number display is already hidden in SB07 in FIG. The net increase number display process is terminated without displaying.

  In FIG. 18 and FIG. 19, the example of calculating and displaying the net increase number during the net increase number calculation period has been described. Next, an example of calculating and displaying the net increase number in the RBB will be described. FIG. 21 (a) is a flowchart for explaining the RBB net increase number display process executed when a bet is set and one game is started in the RBB, and FIG. 21 (b) is an RBB. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the pure increase number display process performed when a medal is awarded in the inside. When receiving the bet command, the sub CPU 71 executes the RBB medium increase number display process of FIG. 21A, and when receiving the payout command, the sub CPU 71 executes the RBB net increase number display process of FIG. 21B.

  First, the RBB net increase number display process of FIG. 21A will be described. In SB23, it is determined whether or not the RBB is being performed. If it is not determined in SB23 that the RBB is in progress, the net increase in RBB display processing is terminated without displaying the net increase in RBB. On the other hand, when it is determined in SB23 that RBB is in progress, the bet number (that is, the bet number) of the current game is subtracted from the net increase in RBB in SB24. The net increased number in the RBB is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 75 so that it can be updated. In SB25, the net increment number display during RBB on the liquid crystal display 27 is updated to the net increment number after subtraction in SB24, and the net increment number display processing during RBB is ended.

  Next, the RBB net increased number display process of FIG. 21B will be described. In SB26, it is determined whether or not the RBB is being performed. If it is not determined in SB26 that the RBB is in progress, the net increase in RBB display processing is terminated without displaying the net increase in RBB. On the other hand, when it is determined in SB26 that the RBB is in progress, the payout number is added to the net increase in RBB in SB27. In SB28, the net increase number display during RBB on the liquid crystal display 27 is updated to the net increase number after addition in SB27, and the net increase number display processing during RBB ends.

  The RBB in SB23 and SB26 includes, for example, not only the RBB that is controlled when not in AT but also the BB that is controlled during the net increase number calculation period and the RBB that is controlled during the display of the end telop. . Therefore, for example, the net increase number in the RBB is displayed together with the net increase number in the net increase number calculation period during the net increase number calculation period, and only the net increase number in the RBB is displayed in the end telop display. Become. For example, during the RBB during the net increase number calculation period, as will be described later (FIG. 27C, etc.), the net increase number during the net increase number calculation period and the net increase number during the RBB are displayed. During the RBB when the flag is set and the end telop is displayed, only the net increase in the RBB is displayed. Note that the end telop may be displayed in a layer having a higher priority than the effect including the corresponding net increase in RBB, and in the RBB, for example, in the upper left area of the liquid crystal display 27, than normal. You may make it display in a small aspect. Further, even when the end telop flag is set, it is necessary that the end telop is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, for 5 seconds or during one game) based on the end telop flag in the RBB. The end telop may be hidden. An example of calculating and displaying the net increase number as information relating to payout displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 in the RBB will be described, but not limited to this, the number of medals paid out and the remaining payout until the end of the RBB is explained. It may be the number of sheets.

  Next, processing when the AT or bonus ends and when the net increase number calculation period ends will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart for explaining an end screen process for displaying an end screen when the AT or bonus ends.

  In SB30, it is determined whether or not the AT or bonus has ended. When it is determined that neither the AT nor the bonus has ended, the end screen processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined at SB30 that either AT or bonus has ended, it is determined at SB31 whether the rainbow flag is set or whether the end telop flag based on the cumulative number is set. If it is not determined in SB31 that the rainbow flag is set, and it is not determined that the end telop flag based on the cumulative number is also set, the game result is displayed in the normal mode as an end screen in SB32. In contrast, when it is determined in SB31 that the rainbow flag or the end telop flag based on the cumulative number is set, it is determined in SB33 whether the end telop flag based on the cumulative number is set. When it is determined that the end telop flag based on the cumulative number is set, the game result is displayed as an end screen based on the cumulative number in the SB 34 (described later with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30). ). On the other hand, if it is not determined in SB33 that the end telop flag based on the cumulative number is set, the game result is displayed in a rainbow manner as an end screen in SB35.

  As a game result in the normal mode or the rainbow mode, when the AT ends, the net increase number calculated during the net increase number calculation period and the number of AT games controlled by the AT during the net increase number calculation period are displayed. . When the bonus is ended (including a bonus started during the advantageous period but ended after the advantageous period ends), the number of medals acquired during the bonus is displayed. In addition, as a game result at the end of the bonus controlled during the AT, in addition to the number of medals acquired during the bonus, the net increase calculated during the net increase calculation period is displayed, and then the AT restart is notified. .

  On the other hand, as a game result in the end telop display mode, when the AT is ended, the net increase number calculated in the net increase number calculation period is not displayed and the AT is controlled in the net increase number calculation period. Only the number of AT games that have been displayed is displayed. Also, in the RBB won or controlled during the AT, the game result when the RBB ends after the end telop is displayed does not display the net increase calculated during the net increase calculation period. Only the net increase in the number is displayed. That is, the net increase number in the RBB unit is displayed without displaying the sum of the net increase number in the net increase number calculation period and the net increase number in the RBB unit.

  Next, various data update processing for updating various data in the effect control processing will be described. FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining an example of various data update processing. The various data includes effect data used when determining the type and content of effects executed by the sub CPU 71, and game history data used for providing a mobile-linked service for accumulating the player's game history. For example, the sub CPU 71 executes various data update processes every time one game is finished and when an operation for ending the mobile link service (accumulation of game history) is received.

  In the various data update processing, first, the effect data is updated in accordance with the progress of the game ended in SB40 (for example, the game result). In the effect data updated (specified) in the various data update processing, the game history indicating the number of times the game has been executed, the number of times of winning for each role shown in FIG. 6, the winning probability (or winning probability), etc. , RBB winning probability, net increase in RBB, and the like. Further, in the advantageous period, the AT number that is the total number of times controlled by the AT, the AT game number that is the number of times the game has been consumed in the AT, the cumulative number during the advantageous period specified from the cumulative number command, This includes the number of stories in the story executed according to the progress, the number of consecutive chans controlled by the AT again from the end of the previous AT until the game is consumed 100 times. The effect data includes not only the data updated in SB 40 but also the net increase number, the OVER display number, the rainbow flag, the end telop flag, etc. updated (specified) in FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG.

  In SB41, it is determined whether or not the mobile phone is linked. Mobile linkage is a mode that is started by inputting a password issued by the management server. The password is stored in the management server by transmitting login information for identifying the player to the management server using a communication terminal (cell phone, smartphone, etc.) owned by the player. Is issued according to the game history of the player and displayed on the communication terminal owned by the player. In the slot machine 1, by entering the password on the mobile link setting screen to be described later, the mobile link start condition is established, and updated according to the progress of the game from the game history of the player stored in the management server It becomes possible.

  If it is not determined in SB41 that the mobile phone is linked, the process proceeds to SB45. On the other hand, when it is determined in SB41 that the mobile linkage is being performed, in SB42, the game history data for mobile linkage is updated according to the game result of the ended game, and the process proceeds to SB43. The game history data for mobile linkage includes, in addition to the various effect data described above, characters and costumes set by the player, the types of missions achieved, and the like.

  In SB43, it is determined whether or not the mobile link has ended. For example, the mobile link is terminated by accepting an operation for selecting the end of the mobile link on the mobile link setting screen during the mobile link. If it is not determined in SB43 that the mobile link has been completed, the process proceeds to SB45. On the other hand, when it is determined in SB43 that the mobile linkage has ended, the process proceeds to SB44, and based on the mobile linkage game history data updated in SB42, a two-dimensional code that can specify the game history is generated to generate liquid crystal. While being displayed on the display device 27, the game history data for mobile linkage is initialized. This prevents the game history data from being carried over after the two-dimensional code is generated / displayed.

  In SB45, it is determined whether or not the advantageous period has ended regardless of whether or not the mobile phone is linked. If it is not determined that the advantageous period has ended, the process proceeds to SB47. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous period has expired, the process proceeds to SB46, where effect data (hereinafter also referred to as the number-related effect data) having a direct relationship with the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period. It is initialized. Specifically, among the production data updated in the SB 40 during the advantageous period, the cumulative number during the advantageous period, the net increase number that is updated (specified) in FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. The rainbow flag and end telop flag are initialized. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the effect data relating to the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period from being carried over later. Also, 0 is set as the net increase number, and “500” is set as the OVER display number. Accordingly, it is possible to prepare for a display when the net increase number calculation period is started under the next AT control.

  Among the effect data, for effect data that is not directly related to the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period (hereinafter also referred to as number-related effect data), even after the advantageous period has ended. Can take over. The number-of-numbers-related effect data includes, for example, the number of games, the role history, the RBB winning probability, the number of ATs, the number of AT games, the number of stories in the story, the number of consecutive chans, the net increase in RBB, and the like. The effect data inherited after the advantageous period ends is used when determining the type and content of the effect to be executed during the next advantageous period. Note that the mobile-linked game history data is not initialized when the advantageous period ends. As a result, as for the game history data for mobile linkage, even if the data is directly related to the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period, it is carried over later and the two-dimensional code at the end of the mobile linkage And can be displayed on a player's communication terminal or the like.

  In SB47, it is determined whether or not the game has been consumed 100 times without newly winning an AT after the previous advantageous period has ended, regardless of whether or not the mobile is linked. If it is not determined that the game has been consumed 100 times without newly winning an AT since the end of the previous advantageous period, the various data update processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game has been consumed 100 times without newly winning an AT after the previous advantageous period has ended, the process proceeds to SB48, where the number-related effect data in the previous advantageous period is initialized. . Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the type and content of the effect to be executed are determined based on the effect data inherited from the end of the previous advantageous period until the so-called continuous change is not performed. However, game history data for mobile linkage updated during mobile linkage (a storage area for storing game history data) is not initialized in SB48. In addition, in SB47, although the example which determines whether the game was digested 100 times without having newly won AT after the last advantageous period ended was demonstrated, not only this but until AT winning For example, it may be determined whether or not the game has been consumed 100 times without shifting to the next advantageous period after the previous advantageous period has ended.

  As shown by SA21, SA22, and SA15 in FIG. 12, at least when the first condition is satisfied by digesting the game 1500 times in the advantageous period, and based on the lowest value of the cumulative number in the advantageous period When the second condition is satisfied when the cumulative number reaches 2400, the advantageous period ends even if there are remaining AT games. As indicated by SB12 to SB14 in FIG. 19, when the first condition and the second condition are soon established, a corresponding end telop is displayed. This point will be described in more detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram for explaining an example of increase / decrease of the cumulative number counter and the net increase in the advantageous period. In FIG. 24, a vertical axis indicates a controlled period type, a cumulative number counter, presence / absence of an end telop, a net increase number, and a slump graph in which the net increase number is graphed, and the horizontal axis indicates The passage of time (game digestion) is shown from left to right. In FIG. 24, the normal period is controlled to the advantageous period (referred to as the first advantageous period in FIG. 24), and when the second condition is soon established in the first advantageous period, RBB1 is won. After the first advantageous period ends when the second condition is established during the RBB and is controlled by the RBB, the advantageous period (referred to as the second advantageous period in FIG. 24) again when a predetermined period of time elapses. The case of being controlled is shown as an example.

  First, when the normal period is controlled to the advantageous period (first advantageous period), as shown in SA01 in FIG. 9 and SA12 and SA14 in FIG. The value of is updated. In the first advantageous period of FIG. 24, an example is shown in which control is performed during the advantageous period and controlled by the AT. When controlled in AT (net increase number calculation period), as shown in SB03 in FIG. 18 and SB10 in FIG. 19, the net increase number is updated according to the progress of the game. During AT, for example, a navigation effect is executed at the time of pressing the push order bell, so the value of the cumulative number counter increases, and the net increase number and the net increase number as shown in the slump graph also increase. Further, during AT, as shown in SB06 in FIG. 18 and SB22 in FIG. 19, the net increase number is updated and displayed on the liquid crystal display 27.

  Thereafter, when the value of the cumulative number counter reaches 2370 until the number of games in the advantageous period reaches the upper limit (1500) according to the progress of the game, as shown in SB13 and SB14 of FIG. 19, the cumulative number counter The end telop flag corresponding to reaching the upper limit is set, the corresponding end telop is displayed, and the net increase from the control by AT is not displayed. That is, when the timing at which the second condition is soon established is reached, the end telop can be displayed to notify that fact, and it is possible to reliably prevent the numerical value exceeding 2400 from being displayed as the net increase number. Can do. The end telop is displayed until the first advantageous period ends due to reaching the upper limit of the cumulative number counter.

  FIG. 24 shows a case where the RBB 1 is won and the RBB is controlled during the AT when the second condition is reached soon. The RBB accompanying the RBB1 winning is continued until 200 sheets are paid out as shown in FIG. For this reason, even after the first advantageous period ends due to reaching the upper limit of the cumulative number counter, the actual net increase is increased by being controlled by the RBB. Specifically, during an AT that has reached the timing when the second condition is soon to be satisfied, for example, when the player wins RBB1 and is controlled to RBB, as shown in FIG. Even after the advantageous period has been reached, the actual net increase may exceed 2400 plus the maximum payout for one game.

  However, as described above, the net increase is not displayed when the timing at which the second condition is soon satisfied is reached. Further, when the value of the cumulative number counter reaches 2400 and the second condition is satisfied and the advantageous period ends, the game data during the advantageous period is initialized in SA15 of FIG. In SB46, the number-related effect data in the advantageous period is initialized. For this reason, even when the actual net increase number exceeds the value obtained by adding the maximum payout number of one game to 2400, it is reliably prevented that a numerical value exceeding 2400 is displayed as the net increase number. be able to. It should be noted that the actual net increase from the AT as shown in the net increase number display column of FIG. 24 during the RBB which is controlled by winning the RBB during the AT when the timing when the second condition is soon satisfied is reached. Instead, only the net increase in the RBB after the start of the RBB is displayed. On the end screen displayed when the RBB is completed, only the net increase in the RBB after the start of the RBB is displayed, not the actual net increase from the AT.

  When the RBB controlled just before the end of the first advantageous period ends, the normal period is already controlled. In FIG. 24, the game is controlled again to the advantageous period (referred to as the second advantageous period in FIG. 24) by digesting the game a predetermined number of times in the normal period after the end of the RBB. In the second advantageous period, an example is shown in which the control is performed by the AT after being controlled by the advantageous general and CZ for a predetermined period. When the advantageous period is controlled, the advantageous period counter and the cumulative number counter are newly updated as the game progresses as described above. Even if it is controlled during the advantageous period, the navigation effect is not executed during advantageous general or CZ, so the cumulative number counter becomes 0 or a negative value, and “0” is set as indicated by SA16 in FIG. In addition, as shown in the slump graph, the net increase in the number is reduced in the same way as in the normal period in the general advantage and CZ.

  In the second advantageous period of FIG. 24, it is assumed that after the general advantage and the CZ, the AT is controlled. When controlled by AT, the net increase is updated and displayed. During the AT, the navigation effect is executed at the time of pushing order bell winning, and the net increase number increases, so the value of the cumulative number counter and the net increase number increase. Thereafter, when the value of the cumulative number counter reaches 2370 until the number of games in the advantageous period reaches the upper limit according to the progress of the game, the corresponding end telop is displayed as in the first advantageous period. , The net increase from the AT controlled is not displayed. That is, when the timing at which the second condition is soon established is reached, the end telop can be displayed to notify that fact, and it is possible to reliably prevent the numerical value exceeding 2400 from being displayed as the net increase number. Can do. The end telop is displayed until the second advantageous period ends when the upper limit of the cumulative number counter is reached.

  When the value of the cumulative number counter reaches 2400 and the second condition is satisfied and the second advantageous period ends, the game data in the second advantageous period is initialized, and the second advantageous period The number-related production data during the period is initialized. In addition, after the second advantageous period is over, since the normal period is controlled, the navigation effect is not executed even if the push-bell wins. For this reason, the net increase in number does not continuously increase as shown by the dotted line in FIG. 24, but decreases as the game progresses as shown by the solid line.

  Next, a display example on the liquid crystal display 27 will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27, a display example such as a net increase in number on the liquid crystal display 27 will be described. FIG. 25 shows a display example when the AT is finished from when the ART is started until the net increase number reaches “2000”. FIGS. 25A and 25B are display examples when the ART is started. When the ART is controlled by the advantageous RT by the promotion replay winning and the ART is started, as shown in FIG. 25A, an image as if the shutter of the camera is closed is displayed in the background, and “AT rush!” Is displayed. A message is displayed, and then the background image for AT is switched as shown in FIG. Thereafter, the net increase number calculation period starts, and calculation of the net increase number is started in SB03 in FIG. 18 and SB10 in FIG.

  As the background image for AT, for example, two characters are displayed in the center of the screen, the number of remaining AT games (LAST: 100G) is displayed in the upper left of the display area, and the net increase during the AT is displayed in the upper right of the display area. The number of sheets (TOTAL: 0) is displayed. Further, when the winning situation is to notify the advantageous operation mode, the advantageous operation mode indicated by a circled numerical image in FIG. 25B is notified.

  FIG. 25 (c) shows a display example when a BE (hereinafter also referred to as a bell) is won in the game shown in FIG. 25 (b). When a bell is won, a message such as “BELL GET!” Is displayed in the center of the screen, and a net increase is added to “9” when nine medals are awarded.

  FIG. 25D shows a display example immediately before the net increase number reaches “500”. The net increase number in the upper right of the display area is displayed as “493”, and the advantageous operation mode is notified by pressing the bell in the push order. FIG. 25 (e) shows a display example when the net winning number reaches “500” after winning the bell in the game shown in FIG. 25 (d). Since nine medals are paid out due to the winning of the bell, the net increase is displayed in addition to “502”. Further, when the OVER display number of “500” is reached, a message “500 OVER!” Is displayed as an OVER display of “500” in SB18 of FIG. 25 (e ') and (e ") show examples of OVER display (normal mode) of" 1000 "and" 1500 ", respectively.

  FIG. 25 (f) is a display example when the game (game) next to the game shown in FIG. 25 (e) is started. When a new game is started, the number of remaining AT games is subtracted and displayed as “35G”, and the number of bets is set as “3”, so that the net increased number is displayed as subtracted as “499”.

  FIG. 25 (g) is a display example when a medal is awarded after the game of FIG. 25 (f) and the net increase number reaches “500” again. As indicated by SB17 and SB21 in FIG. 19, once the net increase number reaches the set OVER display number, the next OVER display number is set. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 25G, even if “500” is reached again, it is possible to prevent the “500” OVER display from being performed again.

  FIG. 25H is a display example of an end screen when the number of remaining AT games is 0 and the AT ends. As the end screen, an image as if the shutter of the camera was closed is displayed in the background, and a message such as “Result AT game number: 300 TOTAL: 594” is displayed in a normal manner as a game result (FIG. 22). (See SB32). When the AT ends, the advantageous period ends, and as a result, the net increase number calculation period also ends.

  Further, in the slot machine 1, when a predetermined notification condition is established, a caution display is performed in order to urge the player to be alerted excessively and prevent the player from being excessively involved in the game. For example, as shown in FIG. 25 (h), at least a predetermined time has elapsed in a predetermined mode (a mode surrounded by a square frame), for example, a message such as “Let's watch out!” It is displayed until The predetermined notification condition is a condition that is established according to the progress of the game. For example, the sub CPU 71 determines that the notification condition is satisfied when a state advantageous to the player such as AT or RBB ends based on a state command from the main control board 63, and displays a caution display on the liquid crystal display 27. . The attention display will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 26 shows a display example and a display example of the end screen when the number of net increase reaches “2000” during AT since the start of ART. FIG. 26A shows a display example immediately before the net increase number reaches “2000”. The net increase in the number in the upper right of the display area is displayed as “1993”, and the advantageous operation mode is notified by pushing-bell winning.

  FIG. 26B is a display example when the net prize is reached to “2000” after winning the bell in the game shown in FIG. When the net increase number reaches “2000”, an execution flag of “2000” OVER display (rainbow mode) is set in SB18 of FIG. 19, and a rainbow flag is set in SB20. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26B, the net increase number and the “2000” OVER display are displayed in a rainbow manner. In the following, the gradation in the drawing indicates that it is displayed in a rainbow pattern.

  FIG.26 (c) is a display example when the game (game) following the game in FIG.26 (b) is started. When a new game is started, the number of remaining AT games is subtracted and displayed as “34G”, and the number of bets is set as “3”, so that the net increased number is displayed as subtracted as “1999”. As shown in FIG. 26 (c), after the display of the net increase number is once displayed in the rainbow mode, the display in the rainbow mode is maintained even if the net increase number is less than “2000”.

  FIG. 26D is a display example when a medal is awarded after the game in FIG. 26C and the net increase number reaches “2000” again. In FIG. 26D, a message such as “BELL GET!” (Hereinafter also referred to as an acquisition message) is displayed without performing OVER display. As described above, when the net increase number reaches “2000” for the first time, the OVER display number for the next stage is already set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. It can be prevented from being performed.

  FIG. 26E shows a display example of an end screen when the number of remaining AT games is 0 and the AT ends. As the end screen, an image as if the shutter of the camera was closed is displayed in the background as in FIG. 25 (h), while a message such as “Result AT game number: 1075 TOTAL: 2145” is displayed as a game result together with a caution display. Is displayed in a rainbow manner (see SB35 in FIG. 22).

  FIG. 26 (e ′) shows an end screen when the number of remaining AT games is 0 and the AT is ended in a state where the net increase is less than “2000” in the game after the net increase reaches “2000”. It is a display example. Also in this case, since the rainbow flag is set, the game result is displayed in a rainbow manner as shown in FIG. 26 (e ') (see SB35 in FIG. 22).

  FIG. 27 shows a display example and a display example of the end screen when the net increase number reaches “2000” during the bonus controlled by winning the RBB (RBB1 in FIG. 27) during the AT after the ART is started. Is shown. FIG. 27A shows a display example immediately before the net increase number reaches “2000”. The net increase number in the upper right of the display area is displayed as “1990”. In FIG. 27 (a), an expectation effect (a scroll display of a message such as “Super Chance!”) Is executed in the lower part of the display area to give a sense of expectation for the bonus winning. The expectation effect can be executed with a predetermined probability even when the bonus is not won.

  FIG. 27B is a display example of a confirmation screen. The sub CPU 71 switches the background image to the background image for the confirmation screen when the display timing determined after winning the bonus is reached. As the background image for the confirmation screen, for example, one character is displayed in the center of the screen, and “Bonus Confirmation!” And “Aim 7! A message such as a red “7” symbol is displayed. As indicated by SB04 and SB07 in FIG. 18, during the confirmation screen display, the net increase number display is not displayed, but the net increase number calculation is continued because it is the net increase number calculation period.

  When the winning RBB1 is won and the bonus is started, the background image is switched to the bonus. As a bonus background image, for example, a single character is displayed in the center of the screen, and a net increase number and a remaining payout number (for example, remaining number: 200) until the bonus ends are displayed in the upper right of the display area. The FIG. 27 (c) shows a display example when a medal payout occurs by winning a small role for the first time after the bonus starts. If a bell win occurs during the bonus where the specified number of bets is “2”, 12 medals are paid out. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 27C, a message such as “12 GET!” Is displayed in the center of the display area, the net increase number is displayed in addition (TOTAL: 1992), and the remaining payout number is displayed in subtraction. (Remaining number of sheets: 188). FIG. 27C shows an example in which the remaining payout number is displayed in the RBB. However, the present invention is not limited to this as described above, and may be, for example, a net increase number or a payout number. .

  FIG. 27D shows a display example when the net prize increases to “2000” after winning the bell in the bonus. When the net increase number reaches “2000” during the bonus, as shown in FIG. 27D, the net increase number and “2000” OVER display are displayed in a rainbow manner.

  FIG. 27E is a display example of an end screen when the bonus is ended due to the number of payouts exceeding 200. As shown in FIG. 27E, the end screen at the end of the bonus that occurred during AT is displayed in the background as if the shutter of the camera was closed, and calculated during the net increase number calculation period. The net increase number (TOTAL: 2169) and the net increase number during bonus (in bonus: 170) are displayed in a rainbow manner. After that, a message such as “bonus complete AT re-entering!” Informing the AT restart is displayed in a rainbow manner, and the AT is restarted.

  FIG. 27F shows a display example when the background image for bonus is switched to the background image for AT again. After switching to the AT background image, as shown in FIG. 27 (f), the net increase number is displayed in a rainbow manner, and the remaining number of AT games immediately before the confirmation screen is displayed. The number of remaining AT games displayed when the bonus won during the AT ends and the AT is restarted is not limited to the number of remaining AT games immediately before the confirmation screen is displayed, for example, when the bonus is won. It may be the number of games obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of remaining AT games. Specifically, for example, even if a bonus is won in a game where the number of remaining AT games is “340” and the number of remaining AT games on the display is subsequently subtracted until the confirmation screen is displayed, When the AT restarts, the number of remaining AT games may be displayed from “339”.

  Thereafter, both the OVER display and the end screen until the advantageous period ends are displayed in a rainbow manner. Note that after the bonus is over, even during the AT, the initial RT is set and the preparation period is reached. In the preparation period, the number of remaining AT games is not subtracted, and subtraction display is resumed after controlling to advantageous RT.

  FIG. 28 shows a display example and a display example of the end screen when the net increase number reaches “2000” during the RBB confirmation screen display during the AT after the ART is started. FIG. 28A shows a display example when the RBB is won immediately before the net increase number reaches “2000”. The net increase number in the upper right of the display area is displayed as “1990”. In FIG. 28A, an expectation effect is executed in the lower part of the display area.

  FIG. 28B is a display example when the display timing determined after winning the bonus is reached and the background image for the confirmation screen is switched. FIG. 28 (c) shows a display example when a bell is won and the net increase number reaches “2000” while the confirmation screen is displayed. Even when the net increase number reaches the OVER display number such as “2000” while the confirmation screen is displayed, it is determined NO in SB16 of FIG. 19 and the processes after SB17 are not performed. For this reason, a message such as “BELL GET!” Is displayed without performing OVER display.

  FIG. 28D is a display example when the bonus start is notified by winning the winning RBB after the net increase number reaches “2000” while the confirmation screen is displayed. The background image for the bonus is switched and a message such as “Bonus started!” Is displayed. Note that the net increase in the upper right corner of the display area exceeds “2000”, but the rainbow flag has not been set yet, so it is displayed in the normal mode.

  FIG. 28 (e) shows a display example when winning a small role for the first time during the bonus. The net increased number is “2017” because 12 medals were paid out after setting the bet number “2” from the state of FIG. 28D. As a result, YES is determined in SB16 of FIG. 19 and an execution flag for OVER display of “2000” is set in SB18, and a rainbow flag is set in SB20. As a result, as shown in FIG. 28 (e), the net increase number and the “2000” OVER display are displayed in a rainbow manner. As described above, when the number of OVER display or “2000” is reached while the bonus winning confirmation screen is displayed, the OVER display is executed at that time, and the first time after the bonus is controlled without setting the rainbow flag. When a medal is paid out, the OVER display is executed, and the rainbow flag is set and the display in the rainbow mode is performed.

  FIG. 29 shows a display example and a display example of the end screen when the cumulative number reaches “2370” when the net increase is displayed in the normal mode after the ART is started. 29 and FIG. 30 described later, on the right side of the display screen example of the liquid crystal display 27, the value of the net increase number and the cumulative number counter when the display screen is displayed. FIG. 29A is a display example immediately before the cumulative number reaches “2370”. The net increase number in the upper right of the display area is displayed as “1593”, and the advantageous operation mode is notified by pushing-bell winning.

  FIG. 29B is a display example when the total number reaches “2370” after winning the bell in the game shown in FIG. When the cumulative number reaches “2370” (FIG. 29B illustrates the case of reaching “2372”), the end telop corresponding to reaching the cumulative number in SB13 of FIG. While the flag is set, the net increase number is set to non-display in SB14. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 29B, in the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display 27, for example, a message such as “Now, the upper limit of the advantageous period will be reached 2400” will be displayed as the end telop, and the net increase Disappears. Also, when it is time to display the end telop display or when the end telop is being displayed, an acquisition message such as “BELL GET!” Accompanying the Bell winning is not displayed as shown in FIG. . Note that an acquisition message such as “BELL GET!” May be displayed when the end telop display is displayed or when the end telop is being displayed. In this case, the end telop may be displayed in a layer having a higher priority than the acquired message. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the end telop than the acquired message.

  FIG. 29C is a display example when the game (game) next to the game in FIG. 29B is started. When a new game is started, the number of remaining AT games is subtracted and displayed to “34G”, and “3” is set as the bet amount, so the cumulative number becomes “2369”, which is less than “2370”. However, as shown in FIG. 29 (c), after the cumulative number reaches “2370”, even if the cumulative number becomes less than “2370” according to the progress of the subsequent game, The non-display of the net increase is maintained.

  Further, while the end telop is being displayed, YES is determined in SB12 of FIG. For this reason, for example, even when the net increase number reaches the set OVER display number, the OVER display is not performed. Further, even when the net increase number reaches “2000”, the process does not shift to SB20 in FIG. 19 and the rainbow flag is not set, so that the net increase number is not displayed in the rainbow rainbow mode. In addition, the end telop display is maintained even when the RBB is won and the confirmation screen is displayed during AT or when the RBB is won and the RBB is being controlled.

  FIG. 29D is a display example of an end screen when a medal is awarded after the game in FIG. 29C and the cumulative number reaches the upper limit “2400” and the AT ends. As the end screen, an image as if the shutter of the camera was closed is displayed in the background as in FIG. 25 (h), while a message such as “Result AT number of games: 815” is displayed as a game result along with a caution display. Later, it shifts to the normal period. Thus, in the game result after the end telop is displayed, the net increase number is not displayed. Thus, it is possible to prevent a numerical value exceeding the upper limit “2400” (the value obtained by adding the maximum payout number of one game to 2400) from being displayed as a net increase number.

  Also, as indicated by SB46 in FIG. 23, when the advantageous period ends, the number-related effect data during the advantageous period is initialized. For this reason, after the advantageous period ends, it is possible to prevent an effect from being executed based on the number-related effect data during the advantageous period. For example, the effect data to be initialized includes the net increase number updated (specified) in FIG. 18, FIG. 19, FIG. For this reason, during the advantageous period to be controlled next, for example, it is possible to prevent the display of the net increase number in consideration of the net increase number during the ended advantageous period. As a result, even during the advantageous period to be controlled next time Therefore, it is possible to prevent a numerical value exceeding the upper limit “2400” of the cumulative number from being displayed as a net increase number.

  On the other hand, even when the advantageous period ends, the number-of-number-related effect data before the advantageous period is carried over thereafter as shown by SB46 in FIG. The number-of-numbers-related production data before the advantageous period includes, as described above, the number of games, the role history, the bonus winning probability, the number of ATs, the number of AT games, the number of stories, the number of consecutive chans, the net increase in RBB, etc. It is. As shown by SB47 and SB48 in FIG. 23, these effect data are carried over until the game is completed 100 times without winning the AT after the advantageous period ends, and the game is played after the advantageous period ends. When the AT is elected by controlling to the next advantageous period before the 100th digestion, the type and content of the effect to be executed can be determined based on the effect data during the previous advantageous period during the AT. The sub CPU 71 specifies that the AT is controlled again until it is consumed 100 times when the effect data of the previous advantageous period remains when the control is performed by the AT. An image to be notified is displayed.

  FIG. 29 (e) shows a display example in the AT when the AT is controlled from the end of the advantageous period until the game is consumed 100 times. As shown in FIG. 29 (e), a background image corresponding to the AT is displayed, and the net increase number is newly updated from “0” and a star mark image is displayed on the left side of the net increase number display. . The star mark is an example of an effect that notifies the user that he / she is continuously controlled under the control of the AT again before digesting 100 times. In the second series, two star marks are displayed. This makes it possible to specify that the current AT is the second consecutive channel. Thereafter, each time the consecutive chunks are overlapped, the number of consecutive chunks in the effect data is updated and the number of star marks is increased by one and displayed.

  FIG. 29 (e ') shows a display example in the controlled AT after the game is digested 100 times without winning the AT after the advantageous period ends. When the game is completed 100 times without winning the AT after the advantageous period is over, as shown by SB47 and SB48 in FIG. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 29 (e '), an image similar to the background image shown in FIG. 29 (a) or the like is displayed, and an image such as a star mark is not displayed.

  FIG. 30 shows a display example when the cumulative number reaches “2370” and a display example of the end screen when the net increase is displayed in a rainbow manner since the ART was started. Note that during the AT, an effect having a predetermined story development is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. This is the same for display screens in other ATs, although the explanation is omitted. For example, a story starts from an effect corresponding to the first episode, and then updated to an effect corresponding to the next number of episodes every time the game is consumed 100 times during the AT. For this reason, when the number of AT games exceeds, for example, “1100”, an effect corresponding to the twelfth episode is started. FIG. 30A is a display example immediately before the cumulative number reaches “2370”. The number of net increase in the upper right of the display area is displayed as “2193” in a rainbow manner, and an advantageous operation manner is informed by pushing-bell winning. In FIG. 30A, it is assumed that the number of AT games exceeds “1100”. For this reason, “12th episode” is displayed in the lower right region of the liquid crystal display 27, indicating that the story effect corresponding to the 12th episode is being executed. Each time the story progresses, the number of stories in the production data is updated.

  FIG. 30B is a display example when the total number reaches “2370” after winning the bell in the game shown in FIG. In the case where the net increase number is displayed in a rainbow manner, when the cumulative number reaches “2370” (FIG. 30B illustrates the case of reaching “2372”), FIG. 30B is displayed. As shown, the end telop is displayed in a rainbow manner at the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display 27, and the net increase in number is not displayed. In addition, when the end telop is displayed, the number of stories is also hidden.

  FIG. 30C is a display example when the next game is started. When a new game is started, the number of remaining AT games is subtracted and displayed to “34G”, and “3” is set as the bet amount, so the cumulative number becomes “2369”, which is less than “2370”. However, as shown in FIG. 30 (c), after the cumulative number reaches “2370”, even if the cumulative number becomes less than “2370” as the game progresses, The non-display of the net increase is maintained.

  FIG. 30D is a display example of an end screen when a medal is given after the game in FIG. 30C and the cumulative number reaches the upper limit “2400” and the AT ends. As the end screen, an image that the camera shutter is closed is displayed in the background, while a message such as “Result AT game number: 1105” is displayed in a rainbow manner as a game result together with a caution display. Transition. Thus, the net increase is not displayed even in the game result after the end telop is displayed in the rainbow mode.

  FIG. 30 (e) is a display example during the AT when the AT is controlled from the end of the advantageous period until the game is consumed 100 times. FIG. 30 (e) illustrates a case where an image corresponding to the number of stories of the effects executed during the previous advantageous period is displayed. As shown in FIG. 30 (e), a background image corresponding to AT is displayed, and the net increase number is newly updated from “0”, and a star mark image is displayed on the left side of the net increase number display. (Similar to FIG. 29), a story number image for specifying how many episodes have progressed in the previous advantageous period is displayed below the net increase number display, such as “Episode 12 reached!”. As a result, it is possible to specify that the current AT is the second consecutive channel and to specify that the story has advanced to the 12th episode in the previous advantageous period. The production during the current AT may start from the 12th or 13th episode, or may start from the 1st episode again.

  FIG. 30 (e ') shows a display example in the controlled AT after the game is digested 100 times without winning the AT after the advantageous period ends. When the game is consumed 100 times without winning the AT after the advantageous period is over, the number-related effect data before the previous advantageous period is also initialized. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 30 (e ′), an image similar to the background image shown in FIG. 30 (a) or the like is displayed, and images such as a star mark and a story count image are not displayed.

  Next, mobile linkage will be described. FIG. 31 is a diagram for explaining a mobile link setting screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 in the player menu state and a screen displayed on the display unit of the communication terminal owned by the player. FIG. 31A is a mobile link start screen for starting mobile link by inputting a password issued by the management server in the mobile link setting screen. On the mobile link start screen, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), a message prompting the input of a password is displayed, and a character string is displayed below. By operating the production operation unit 81, the issued password is input, and by selecting the decision icon, the mobile link is started. As shown in SB42 of FIG. Linked game history data is accumulated.

  FIG. 31 (b) shows a case where the two-dimensional code generated based on the game history data for mobile link is displayed by ending the mobile link by operating the effect operation unit 81 in the mobile link setting screen. This is a mobile link end screen. On the mobile link end screen, a two-dimensional code is displayed as shown in FIG. As shown by SB44 in FIG. 23, the displayed two-dimensional code is a code that can specify game history data for mobile linkage. The player can check the game history displayed on the display unit of the communication terminal based on the mobile history game history data by reading the two-dimensional code with the communication terminal. Further, the communication terminal can read the two-dimensional code to transmit game history data for mobile linkage to the management server and accumulate it as the game history of the player.

  FIG. 31C is a game history screen displayed on the display unit of the communication terminal by reading the two-dimensional code with the communication terminal owned by the player. By reading the two-dimensional code, the display unit of the communication terminal displays the current game history accumulated during the current mobile link and the total game history added to the game history accumulated in the past. The game history data for mobile linkage includes, for example, not only game history data that is not directly related to the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period controlled during mobile linkage, but also payout during the advantageous period. It also includes game history data having a direct relationship with the number of medals awarded. For this reason, on the game history screen, as shown in FIG. 31 (c), a game history (for example, the number of games, the number of ATs, the number of ATs, etc.) not directly related to the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period In addition to the number of games, the number of stories in the story, etc., it is possible to display a game history (AT net increase number) having a direct relationship with the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period.

(About warning display)
Next, the attention display shown in FIG. 25 and the like will be described in detail. The sub CPU 71 outputs to the liquid crystal display 27 information that can specify an image to be displayed in accordance with the progress of the game and a layer and a display position for each image, and the layer on which the image is drawn depends on the priority of the layer. The superimposed image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment determines the relationship (layer, display position, etc.) with other images (effects) displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 in order to fully exert the function of alerting by attention display. Yes.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram for explaining areas used for display, layer priorities, and the like among the display areas of the liquid crystal display 27 for each of the caution display and other image displays. FIG. 32A is a diagram showing areas 1 to 5 in which the display area of the liquid crystal display 27 is divided into five. FIG. 32B is a diagram showing the priorities of regions and layers used for display for each type of image.

  For attention display, the area 2 corresponding to the center of the display area shown in FIG. 32A is used, and “1”, which is the highest layer priority, is set. For this reason, even if another image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27, the image of the caution display can always be displayed so that the player can visually recognize it.

  The error notification is to notify the type of error when the sub CPU 71 determines that an error has occurred based on the error command. For error notification, areas 1 and 3 corresponding to the upper and lower parts of the display area are used, and “2” is set as the layer priority.

  In the navigation effect, the sub CPU 71 notifies the advantageous operation mode based on the advantageous operation mode command from the main CPU 61. For the navigation effect, the area 3 corresponding to the lower part of the display area is used, and “3” is set as the layer priority.

  The history display is to display a net increase in the advantageous state or the number of games (for example, the number of AT games) in the advantageous state when the advantageous state for the player such as AT or RBB ends. is there. For the history display, an area 3 corresponding to the lower part of the display area is used, and “4” is set as the layer priority.

  The suggestion display suggests a setting value set in the slot machine 1. In the suggestion display, for example, suggestion A that suggests that there is a high possibility that the set value is an even number, suggestion B that confirms that the set value is 5 or more, This includes a suggestion C for confirming that the set value is 6, for example. When the set value is set, the main CPU 61 outputs a command that can specify the set value to the sub CPU 71. The sub CPU 71 identifies a set value based on the command, and determines whether or not to perform suggestion display, the type of suggestion display, and the like by random number lottery based on the set value (hereinafter also referred to as suggestion display lottery). The suggestion display uses one of the areas 4 and 5 corresponding to the left and right of the display area, and “5” is set as the layer priority.

  The serif display is an effect that can be developed up to three stages over a plurality of games. In the first stage of the line display, explanation / explanation of effects and the like generated in the slot machine 1 is displayed. The display after the second stage of the line display is performed when the next game is started after the game in which the first stage display has been performed. The display after the second stage of the line display indicates the set value set in the slot machine 1 like the suggestion display. The second stage serif display suggests the possibility that the set value is 5 or more. The third-level serif display suggests the possibility that the set value is 6. Therefore, the production of the first stage of the line display is only a material for deepening the understanding of the production and the like. However, from the second stage and subsequent stage of the dialogue display, the player can predict the set value that has been set.

  The sub CPU 71 specifies a set value based on a command that can specify the set value, and based on the set value, the presence / absence of execution of the line display, the type of line display (how many stages are developed, the contents of the line, etc.) ) Is determined by random lottery or the like (hereinafter also referred to as a “serif display lottery”). The line display uses different areas depending on the stage. Region 1 corresponding to the upper part of the display region is used for the first stage image of the line display. Region 2 corresponding to the central portion of the display region is used for the second stage image of the line display. A region 3 corresponding to the lower portion of the display region is used for the third stage image of the line display. In the line display, “6” is set as the layer priority in any stage of the image.

  The background is to display an image according to the state controlled in the slot machine 1 (general gaming state, RBB, CZ, AT, error, etc.). The sub CPU 71 displays a background image corresponding to the state specified from the state command or the like. As the background, the entire display area is used, and “7”, which is the lowest layer priority, is set. For this reason, even if a background image is displayed on the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 27, it is possible to preferentially display other images superimposed on the background image. As described above, the chance button effect image only needs to be displayed on a layer having a higher priority than the background image. For example, the priority of the layer is any one of “3” to “6”. It may be set.

  Here, the priority etc. regarding the display of the end telop will be described. The display of the end telop is displayed at least in a history display, suggestion display, serif display, and a layer having a higher layer priority than the background. Further, the display of the end telop may be displayed on the same layer as any one of the caution display, error notification, and navigation effect, and is displayed on a higher priority layer. There may be.

  Moreover, since the end telop is displayed in the area 2 of FIG. 32A as shown in FIG. 29 and the like, for example, an example in which the end telop is not superimposed on the area 3 displaying the navigation effect is shown. However, the end telop area and the navigation effect area may partially overlap each other. Even in this case, it is only necessary that both the display of the end telop and the display of the navigation effect are displayed so as to be recognized or specified by the player.

  Further, regarding the relationship between the end telop and the player menu screen according to the operation on the effect operation unit 81, the player menu screen can be displayed even when the end telop is displayed. The player menu screen may be displayed in a layer having a higher priority than the end telop. Thereby, it is possible to notify the end of the advantageous period by displaying the end telop while preventing the end telop from lowering the visibility of menu items and the like on the player menu screen.

  FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 are timing charts for explaining an example of effects related to attention display. FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 explain a case where a notice display condition for caution display is established by terminating AT as an advantageous state. FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 show a plurality of examples of production. From the top, the type of gaming state, the number of games, the rotation state of the reels 11L to 11R, the background, identification, suggestion, and attention of the production, respectively. Indicates the execution status. A background image corresponds to the background. The suggestion display corresponds to the suggestion. A caution display corresponds to the caution. Specifically, error notifications other than these, navigation effects, history display, serif display (first stage), and the like are supported. The suggestion is an image displayed as the game progresses. The specification is an image that is displayed when a specific condition related to a game is satisfied, which is a condition that can be satisfied as the game progresses. 33 to 42 referred to in the description of the caution display, an example will be described in which the condition for displaying the end telop is not satisfied. However, when the cumulative number has reached “2370”, the advantageous period counter When the value is 5 or less, the end telop display is performed as described with reference to FIGS. When the caution display described in FIGS. 33 to 42 is performed during the display of the ending telop, the ending telop display is ended at the timing when the caution display is performed.

  In the slot machine 1 in the present embodiment, when the final game in an advantageous state is started, an advantageous ending effect for ending the state is performed during the final game. During the advantageous ending for the end of the state, a caution display and a history display are performed, and a navigation effect and a suggestion display are performed according to the winning situation and the result of the suggestion display lottery. Further, in the subsequent game after the end of the ending effect, the dialogue display is performed according to the result of the dialogue display lottery. First, with reference to FIG. 33, an example of an effect (hereinafter, also referred to as an attention completion pattern) in which a warning display is completed during an ending effect will be described.

  FIG. 33A is a timing chart for explaining Production Example 1 in which history display and speech display are performed as specific display. Timing 1 indicates the timing at which one game (final game) is started after the reel rotation is started when the value of the remaining AT game number counter is “1”. Until the final game is started, an AT background (for example, an image of falling lightning, a story image including a narrative element, etc.) is displayed as a background image, whereas the final game is started It is switched to the ending background for AT end. As the ending background for AT end, for example, an image in which the shutter of the camera is closed is displayed (described later with reference to FIG. 35A, etc.).

  In the final game with the number of games “N + 1” in FIG. 33 (a), for example, the push order bell is not won, so the navigation effect is not performed, and the suggestion display is not performed. Also not done. Timing 2 is a timing at which a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the final game was started, and indicates a timing at which a caution display is started.

  The caution display is displayed in the layer having the highest priority in the area 2. The attention display is displayed until a predetermined time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the display is started. The sub CPU 71 increments the value of the caution display counter capable of specifying the time during which the caution display is displayed by one at predetermined intervals, and when the value of the caution display counter reaches a value corresponding to “3 seconds”. The warning display ends. The attention display counter is added and updated in a predetermined area of the RAM 75.

  Timing 3 shows the timing when the stop switches 21L to 21R are operated to stop the rotation of all the reels 11L to 11R and the final game is finished. When the final game is finished, a history display is performed, and the net increase in the number of medals and the number of AT games in an advantageous state of ending are notified. The history display is displayed in the layer of the region 3 and the priority “4”. For this reason, the caution display is not hindered by the history display.

  Timing 4 indicates a timing at which the sub CPU 71 determines that a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the caution display based on the caution display counter and ends the caution display. The caution display can be continued until a predetermined time elapses while maintaining the display mode at the start of display in the area 2, and is not disturbed by other images (history display, background, etc.). For this reason, it is possible to sufficiently exert the function of alerting by the attention display.

  Timing 5 shows the timing at which the game is started in the normal period after the end of AT. When the game in the normal period is started, the background is switched to the normal background image. Also, in the first game in the normal period after the end of AT, a line display is performed. Accordingly, it is possible to provide the fun of guessing the set value by developing the line display to the second stage, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  FIG. 33 (b) is a timing chart for explaining an effect example 2 in which a navigation effect is performed as a specific display by winning a push order bell or the like in the final game. When the final game is started, as shown in the timing 1, the AT background is switched from the AT background to the ending background for the AT end, and a navigation effect is displayed. Even when the navigation effect is displayed, a caution display is performed at timing 2 as in the effect example 1 of FIG. The navigation effect is displayed in the layer of the region 3 and the priority “3”. For this reason, the caution display is not hindered by the navigation effect. Since timing 2 and subsequent steps are the same as production example 1 in FIG. 33A, description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 33 (c) is a timing chart for explaining Production Example 3 in which suggestion display is performed in the final game. Timing 2 indicates the timing at which a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the final game was started, as in FIG. The suggestion display starts at timing 2. When the suggestion display is performed, the caution display is not performed at the timing 2. Therefore, in the final game, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the suggestion display is performed at timing 2 or the caution display is performed.

  Timing 2 'indicates the timing at which the suggestion display ends. When the suggestion display ends, a caution display is started. The suggestion display is a display that suggests the set value (advantage) of the slot machine 1, and therefore tends to concentrate the player's line of sight. For this reason, in the slot machine 1, the caution display is performed after the suggestion display ends without causing the caution display to be accompanied with the suggestion display. Further, since the caution display is displayed in the area 2 different from the areas 4 and 5 where the suggestion display has been performed, the player can easily notice that the display content has changed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the caution display from being overlooked, and it is possible to sufficiently exert the attention-calling function by focusing attention on the caution display.

  FIG. 33 (d) is a timing chart for explaining an effect example 4 in which a navigation effect and a suggestion display are performed in the final game. In the description of FIG. 33D, reference is made to FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining the display content of the production example 4 on the liquid crystal display 27.

  At timing 1 at which the final game is started, the ending background is switched and a navigation effect is performed. As shown in FIG. 35A, an AT end ending background image such as a camera shutter is displayed over the entire display area, and a navigation effect image is displayed in area 3.

  At timing 2, suggestion display is performed. In the example of FIG. 35B, an image of the character A is displayed in the area 5 as a suggestion display. The suggestion display that displays the character A is an example of the suggestion A that suggests that there is a high possibility that the set value that is set is an even number (2, 6). Thereby, the advantage of the slot machine 1 can be suggested to the player, and the player can be provided with the fun of making a guess.

  At timing 2 ′, the suggestion display is terminated and a caution display is performed. As shown in FIG. 35 (c), the suggestion display in the region 5 ends, and the caution display is performed in the region 2. At timing 3, the final game is finished and history display is performed. As shown in FIG. 35 (d), “TOTAL: 540 sheets” is displayed as the history display in the area 3, and the caution display in the area 2 is continuously performed without being obstructed by the history display.

  At timing 5, a game is started in a normal period after the end of AT, the background is switched to a normal background, and a line display is performed. As a normal background image, for example, a sun image is displayed at the upper right of the display area as shown in FIG. 35 (e), and a corresponding image that is not shown in FIG. Is displayed. As the first stage of the line display, a line such as “Character A is ok” is displayed as a message explaining the suggestion display displayed in FIG. This makes it easier for the player to understand the content of the suggestion display.

  If the second and subsequent stages are not performed as the line display, the line display is ended when the next game is started. On the other hand, when performing the second and subsequent stages as the line display, when the next game is started, a line such as “I'm expecting!” Is displayed in the area 2 as shown in FIG. The possibility that the set value is 4 or more and the possibility that the set value is 6 are different depending on the contents of the second and subsequent lines. Thereby, the material which suggests a setting value can be provided and predicted with respect to a player, and the interest of a game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b), description will be given of an effect example (hereinafter, also referred to as an attention incomplete pattern) in which the caution display is not completed during the ending effect. FIG. 34A is a timing chart for explaining the effect example 5 in the case where the suggestion display is not performed during the ending effect, and FIG. 34B is the case where the suggestion display is performed during the ending effect. It is a timing chart for explaining the production example 6.

  The attention display is continuously displayed until a predetermined time elapses after the display is started. For this reason, if an operation for ending the final game and starting the next game (betting number setting, start switch 19 operation) is performed before a predetermined time elapses after the caution display is started, the ending effect is given. Regardless of whether or not the suggestion display is performed, the caution display is not completed during the ending effect as shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b).

  Timing 6 indicates the timing at which the game is started in the normal period after the end of AT. Similar to FIG. 33, at timing 6, the background is switched to a normal background image. In the first game in the normal period after the end of AT, a line display is performed. In FIGS. 34 (a) and (b), since the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the caution display is started at the timing 6, the caution display is continuously performed.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 35 (g) and (h), the display contents of effect example 6 on the liquid crystal display 27 will be described. At timing 6, a line display is performed and a caution display is continuously performed. The first stage of the dialogue display is displayed in the layer having the priority “6” in the region 1, while the caution display is displayed in the layer “1” having the highest priority in the region 2. Is done. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 35G, it is possible to prevent the caution display from being hindered by the serif display.

  Timing 7 indicates a timing when a predetermined time elapses after the caution display is started and the caution display is ended. FIG. 35 (h) shows the display contents when the second and subsequent stages are performed as a line display when the next game is started. The attention display has already ended at timing 7. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 35 (h), it is possible to display the second-stage line in the region 2 without affecting the attention display.

  Next, referring to FIG. 34 (c), the effect when the warning display is not completed during the ending effect and an error occurs during the operation for the first game start in the normal period after the AT ends. 10 is a timing chart for explaining Example 7; FIG. 34C illustrates a case where a selector error has occurred. Timing 8 shows the timing when a medal is jammed in the selector and a selector error occurs although a medal is inserted into the medal slot 25 for the first game start in the normal period. That is, the timing 8 is a timing at which the sub CPU 71 specifies that a selector error has occurred based on an error command output from the main CPU 61. When it is determined that an error has occurred, the background is switched to an error background, and an error message corresponding to the type of error is displayed. Further, at timing 8, error notification is performed as a specific display, and since the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the caution display is started, the caution display is continuously performed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 35 (i), the display content of the production example 7 in the liquid crystal display 27 is demonstrated. At timing 8, a character image with a troublesome expression is displayed on the upper right of the screen as an error background image, and a corresponding image is displayed on the entire display area, although not shown in FIG.

  Further, as error notifications, message images such as “selector error!” In area 1 and “please call a clerk!” In area 3 are displayed in a layer of priority “2”. On the other hand, the caution display is continuously displayed on the layer having the highest priority in the area 2. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 35 (i), it is possible to prevent the caution display from being hindered by error notification or the like. Note that the caution display ends at timing 9 when a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 34C and FIG. 35I, an example in which caution display is continuously performed even during error notification has been described. However, during error notification, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 34 (d), during error notification (timing 8 ′ to 10 ′), the warning display is temporarily stopped, and attention is paid after the error notification ends. The display may be resumed.

  The caution display to be resumed may be displayed for the remaining time up to a predetermined time when it is temporarily stopped. Specifically, the value of the caution display counter at the time of suspension may be maintained, updated from the value after the restart, and the caution display may be terminated when a value corresponding to a predetermined time is reached. Further, when the caution display is resumed, the caution display may be performed until a predetermined time (3 seconds) elapses from the resumption point. Specifically, the sub CPU 71 has determination information for determining whether or not the caution display is displayed for a predetermined time (3 seconds), and is displayed for a predetermined time based on the determination information after the error notification is completed. In such a case, the caution display is not performed, and the caution display may be resumed when the predetermined time has not been displayed based on the determination information. Further, when the error notification is performed, the caution display may be terminated, and the caution display may not be performed even after the error notification ends.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the attention display is performed when the AT ends in an advantageous state has been specifically described. However, the slot machine 1 is also careful when the bonus controlled by the RBB winning is ended. Display. The slot machine 1 may display the caution at other timings as long as the caution display is performed at least when an advantageous state such as AT or bonus ends.

(About processing related to extra effects)
Next, processing related to the extra effect will be described in detail. In the effect control process, in the AT process SA07, SA08, and SA09 shown in FIG. 9, the main CPU 61 side is related to the extra of the effects during the AT based on the command output for each game during the AT. Control the production. FIG. 36 is a diagram for explaining an example of the addition related effect control process for controlling the effect related to the addition in the effect control process.

  In SB50, the additional game number command, the remaining AT game number command, and the remaining upper limit game number command that are output for each game in the AT (SA07, SA08, SA09 in FIG. 9) are received, and the processes after SB51 are received. Execute. In SB51, it is determined whether or not the end telop flag is set. When it is determined in SB51 that the end telop flag has been set, the end telop flag has already been set. Therefore, the additional related effect control process is performed without determining the remaining upper limit number of games up to the upper limit number of advantageous periods. finish. On the other hand, if it is not determined in SB51 that the end telop flag is set, it is determined in SB52 whether the remaining upper limit number of games up to the upper limit number of advantageous periods is 5 or less. The remaining upper limit game number up to the upper limit number of advantageous periods is specified based on the remaining upper limit game number command from the main CPU 61. When it is determined in SB52 that the remaining upper limit number of games until the upper limit number of advantageous periods is 5 or less, the process proceeds to SB53.

  In SB53, an end telop flag for displaying the corresponding end telop is set. As the end telop when it is determined that the number of remaining upper limit games up to the upper limit number of advantageous periods is 5 or less, a message such as “Soon, the upper limit of advantageous period 1500G will be reached” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. To do. Thus, the end telop is displayed until the advantageous period ends.

  On the other hand, when it is not determined in SB52 that the remaining upper limit number of games until the upper limit number of advantageous periods is 5 or less, the process proceeds to SB54. In SB54, it is determined whether or not the added game number added in the current game specified from the added game number command is a value greater than zero. If it is not determined at SB54 that the number of games added this time is greater than 0, the addition related effect control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined at SB54 that the number of additional games this time is greater than 0, it is determined at SB55 whether the number of remaining AT games is equal to or greater than the remaining upper limit number of games. The remaining AT game number is specified from the remaining AT game number command received in SB50. Further, the remaining upper limit game number is specified from the remaining upper limit game number command received in SB50.

  When it is not determined in SB55 that the number of remaining AT games (the number of games after the number of added games is added) is equal to or greater than the remaining upper limit number of games, that is, the remaining upper limit number of games is still consumed even if the remaining AT game number is consumed. In the situation that does not reach, an additional effect for notifying the number of additional games specified from the additional game number command is set in SB56. Thereby, an extra effect is executed. For example, when the added game number is “100”, a message such as “100 game GET!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 and a sound effect such as “Dawn!” Is displayed on the speakers 31L and 31R. Output from.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in SB55 that the number of remaining AT games is equal to or more than the remaining upper limit number of games, that is, in a situation where the remaining upper limit number of games is reached before the remaining AT number of games is consumed, a special background is obtained in SB57. Is set and it is determined whether or not the special background is being executed. When it is determined in SB57 that the special background has been set and the special background is being executed, the addition related effect control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in SB57 that the special background has already been set and the special background is being executed, the special background is set in SB58 and the addition related effect control process is terminated. Thus, the special background is executed premierly only in a situation where the number of AT games is added and it is determined that the advantageous period can be continued up to the upper limit number of games (1500) in the advantageous period. As the special background, for example, a special background screen having a story characteristic is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 over the remaining upper limit number of games, and corresponding music / sound effects are output from the speakers 31L and 31R. Thereby, the player can have a sense of superiority in completing the advantageous period. The special background will be described later with reference to FIG. Even during the period until the special background is set, when the cumulative number reaches “2370” or when the remaining upper limit number of games becomes 5 or less, the corresponding end telop is displayed. In addition, during the display of the end telop, even if the conditions for executing the extra effect and the conditions for setting the special background are satisfied, the execution of the extra effect and switching to the special background are restricted and the end telop display is continued. And Also, when a special background is set, the chance button effect may not be executed even at the timing of executing the chance button effect, and the special background is set in a game that executes the chance button effect. If there is a possibility that the chance button effect will be executed (when an additional game has occurred and the value obtained by adding the additional game number to the remaining AT game number exceeds the remaining upper limit game number), the chance button effect is not executed. It may be.

  Next, an example of controlling a predetermined effect including an extra effect and a special background depending on whether or not the remaining upper limit game number is reached before the remaining AT game number is consumed is shown in FIG. The timing chart shown in FIG. FIG. 37 (a) shows an example when the upper limit has not yet been determined even if the remaining number of AT games is consumed, and FIG. 37 (b) shows the remaining time until the remaining number of AT games is consumed. The example at the time of reaching the upper limit reaching the upper limit number of games is shown. 37 (a) and (b), respectively, from the top, the rotation status of the reels 11L to 11R, the number of remaining AT games, the number of remaining upper limit games, whether or not an extra lottery is executed, whether or not an extra effect is executed, and special Indicates whether or not the background is executed.

  FIG. 37 (a) shows a case where an extra lottery condition is satisfied in the game A shown in the reel column. When game A is started, the number of remaining AT games is “431”, and the remaining upper limit number of games is “497”. In this case, when “50” is determined as the number of additional games by the extra lottery, the number of remaining AT games after the addition is “481”, and it is determined that the upper limit has not yet been reached and the upper limit has not yet been reached. In the SB 56 of 36, an extra effect for informing the extra game number “50” is executed.

  FIG. 37 (b) shows a case where the extra lottery condition is satisfied in the game B shown in the reel column. When the game B is started, the remaining AT game number is “468”, and the remaining upper limit game number is “497”. In this case, when “50” is determined as the number of additional games by the extra lottery, the number of remaining AT games after the addition is “518”, and the upper limit reached is reached when the remaining upper limit number of games is reached. When the determination is YES in 36 SB55, execution of the extra effect is restricted (see the extra effect column in FIG. 37B). At the time of reaching the upper limit, the special background can be executed because the special background is set by SB58 in FIG. 36 (see the special background column in FIG. 37B). Even when the special background is being executed, when the cumulative number reaches “2370” or the remaining upper limit number of games becomes 5 or less, the corresponding end telop is preferentially displayed.

  FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining a display example when the background screen during AT is switched from the normal effect to the special background. FIG. 38A is a timing chart showing an example in which the background screen during AT is switched from the normal effect to the special background. In FIG. 38 (a), from the top, the type of gaming state, the number of games, and the execution status of the navigation game among the effects executed on the liquid crystal display 27 are shown. Indicates the presence or absence. FIG. 38 (a) shows (b) as the timing during the game of N + 4, and (c) shows the timing at which the game of N + 5 is started. FIGS. 38B and 38C show background examples in the AT corresponding to the timings (b) and (c) shown in FIG.

  During AT (ART) during the advantageous period, as shown in the background column of FIG. 38 (a), either the normal effect or the special background is executed as the background during AT. In the example of FIG. 38 (a), it is assumed that in the game of N + 4, it is determined that the number of AT games is added and the AT continues until the upper limit number of advantageous periods. Therefore, in FIG. 38 (a), the background by the normal effect is displayed until N + 4, and the special background is displayed after N + 5. FIG. 38B shows a background display example of a normal effect, and FIG. 38C shows a background display example of a special background.

  As shown in FIG. 38 (b), for example, two characters are displayed in the center of the screen, and the number of remaining AT games (the number of remaining AT games is 350 at the upper left of the display area as the number of remaining games in the background by the normal effect. In this case, LAST: 350G) is displayed, the total number of games played in the AT (TOTAL: 535G) is displayed, and the net increase number (GET: 1105) in the AT is displayed in the upper right of the display area. The total number of games is the total number of games digested during the AT. On the other hand, the number of games played during the advantageous period includes all the times during which the game during the advantageous period has been consumed, regardless of whether the game is in an AT or CZ or bonus state. Therefore, the total number of games does not necessarily match the number of games played during the advantageous period. In the normal performance, the remaining upper limit game number up to the upper limit number of advantageous periods is not displayed as the remaining game number.

  On the other hand, in the special background, after two characters are displayed at the center of the screen as shown in FIG. In the special background, the number of remaining games at the upper left of the display area is switched from the number of remaining AT games to the number of remaining upper limit games. If the remaining upper limit number of games is 440, for example, “until ending: 440G” is displayed as shown in FIG. Even in the special background, the number of net increase is continuously displayed. On the other hand, the total number of games is not displayed in the special background, but may be continuously displayed even after the special background starts.

  In addition, in the upper center of the display area, a message such as “completion of complete run! ~ Congratulation ~” is displayed, thereby informing that the AT has been confirmed for the upper limit number of advantageous periods. Further, as shown in FIG. 38C, the background of the band-like area at the top of the display area where various information is displayed is displayed in a special manner (for example, a rainbow manner). The gradation in the drawing indicates that it is displayed in a special manner. Accordingly, it is possible to emphasize and notify that it is determined that the AT will continue until the upper limit number of advantageous periods, and it is possible to improve the player's sense of superiority.

<About administrator menu state and player menu state>
In the effect control process, it is possible to execute a process for displaying an administrator menu screen for controlling / displaying the management items for the administrator by controlling to the administrator menu state during the setting change process. Further, in the effect control process, it is possible to execute a process for displaying a player menu screen for controlling and displaying the game items for the player by controlling the player menu state during the game standby. FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the display timing of each of the administrator menu screen and the player menu screen, the termination timing, and the control contents when an error occurs during menu display.

  The sub CPU 71 displays the administrator menu screen when the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 is operated during the setting change process. Further, the sub CPU 71 determines whether an operation to the start switch 19 is detected (setting is confirmed) in the setting change process and the change process start switch 56 is turned off (key off) (that is, a setting change end command is received). When the predetermined time elapses without 81 being operated, or when the setting of any management item is completed in the administrator menu state, the display of the administrator menu screen is terminated. The sub CPU 71 determines that the setting change process is in progress from the reception of the setting change start command to the reception of the setting change end command. During this time, the sub CPU 71 displays an administrator menu screen by executing a sub-side setting change state process which will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The sub CPU 71 executes an error determination process for determining whether or not a predetermined error has occurred on the sub CPU 71 side. However, the sub CPU 71 performs the same in the administrator menu state. On the other hand, as described above, the main CPU 61 does not execute the error determination process on the main CPU 61 side when the setting change process is being executed. For this reason, when the sub CPU 71 determines that an error has occurred in the error determination processing on the sub CPU 71 side while the administrator menu screen is displayed, the error (sub system) on the sub CPU 71 side rather than the administrator menu screen. Error) Notification is given priority. Here, the sub system error means a communication error between the main control board and the sub control board, a communication error between the sub CPU and the liquid crystal display, or the like.

  The sub CPU 71 displays the player menu screen by operating the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 during the game standby. In addition, the sub CPU 71 operates in advance with the determination switch 81a being operated in a state in which the “end” item for ending the display of the player menu screen is selected, or without being operated by the effect operation unit 81. The display of the player menu screen is terminated when time elapses or the setting of the mobile link service (including quick start described later) is completed on the player menu screen. For example, the sub CPU 71 determines that the game is on standby from when the game result command is received until the reel rotation start command is received. During this time, the sub CPU 71 displays a player menu screen by executing a sub-side game standby process described later with reference to FIG.

  The sub CPU 71 executes an error determination process for determining whether or not a predetermined error has occurred on the sub CPU 71 side. However, the sub CPU 71 executes the same in the player menu state. Further, the main CPU 61 executes an error determination process on the main CPU 61 side even during game standby. For this reason, when the sub CPU 71 determines that an error has occurred in each of the error determination processes on the main CPU 61 side and the sub CPU 71 side, the error notification is given priority over the player menu screen.

  The display of both the administrator menu screen and the player menu screen ends when a predetermined time elapses without the effect operation unit 81 being operated. The specific time defined as the time for ending the administrator menu screen is set to be shorter than the predetermined time defined as the time for ending the player menu screen. For example, the specific time is set to 30 seconds, while the predetermined time is set to 3 minutes. For this reason, when it is left without being operated on the menu screen, the display of the administrator menu screen can be terminated at a timing earlier than the timing of terminating the display of the player menu screen. Thereby, the slot machine 1 can reduce the possibility that the administrator menu screen is seen by the player. Hereinafter, the player menu screen will be specifically described.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the player menu screen in the player menu state. During the game standby, the sub CPU 71 first displays a game screen (including a screen displayed during reel rotation) on the liquid crystal display 27, and transitions to a demo screen when a predetermined time elapses. As described above, when the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 is operated while the game screen or the demonstration screen in the game standby is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27, the sub CPU 71 is controlled to the player menu state. Then, the menu top screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 as the player menu screen. On the menu top screen, a “quick start” item, a “mobile-linked service” item, a “composition composition” item, a “production customization” item, and an “end” item, which are examples of game items, are displayed.

  The “quick start” item is an item for starting a quick start. Quick start is a game that can output information that can specify the game history such as the number of games, the number of small role winnings and the number of bonus winnings accumulated after the quick start is selected without entering a password at the end of the game Mode. By using a portable terminal or the like to output information output at the end of the game to a predetermined server, the player can update the game history of the player managed in the server.

  The “mobile link service” item is an item for starting the mobile link service. The mobile-linked service allows a game to be played in a state in which the player's game history is reflected by inputting a password issued by a predetermined server, and updates the player's game history on the server. It is a possible game mode. At the end of the game, similar to the quick start, information that can identify the accumulated game history can be output, and the game history of the player managed in the server can be updated.

  The “combination composition” item is information related to a combination defined in the slot machine 1 (for example, information shown in FIG. 6 such as combination name, symbol combination, number of payouts, etc.) and a game state transition (for example, FIG. This is an item for displaying a transition. The “production customization” item is an item for selecting and setting a type of production executed according to the background and the progress of the game in accordance with the player's preference. The “end” item is an item for ending the player menu screen and switching to the demo screen.

  On the menu top screen, one of items displayed by operating the up / down / left / right switch of the effect operation unit 81 is selected, and the item selected by operating the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 To decide. The sub CPU 71 executes processing corresponding to the determined item. A cursor is displayed for the game item selected by operating the up / down / left / right switch on the player menu screen, and the game item is highlighted (see FIG. 40, FIG. 41 (a), etc.).

  When the “quick start” item is selected and determined, the sub CPU 71 displays a start screen for starting the quick start on the liquid crystal display 27 and then transitions to the demonstration screen. When the start screen is displayed, the CPU 71 executes a process for starting a quick start (such as starting to accumulate game history in the RAM 75).

  When the “mobile-linked service” item is selected and determined, the sub CPU 71 displays the start screen of the portable-linked service on the liquid crystal display 27 and then transitions to the demonstration screen. As the start screen for the mobile link service, first, a password input screen is displayed, and a screen for starting the mobile link service is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 when the input password is an appropriate password. Further, the CPU 71 executes processing for starting the mobile link service (game history reflection, start of accumulation of game history in the RAM 75, etc.).

  When the “combination composition” item is selected and determined, the sub CPU 71 displays information relating to the combination defined in the slot machine 1 (for example, combination name, symbol combination, number of payouts, etc.) as the second layer screen. The information shown in FIG. 6), the transition of the gaming state (for example, FIG. 8, AT transition, etc.), etc. are displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. When the “composition configuration” item is selected and determined, first, a combination composition screen showing information on the combination defined in the slot machine 1 is displayed, and “next” item and “return to menu top” item are displayed. indicate. When the “next” item is selected and determined, a game flow screen showing information relating to the game state transition (for example, FIG. 8 or AT transition) is displayed, and the “return” item and “return to menu top” are displayed. Display items. When the “return” item is selected and determined, the screen returns to the role composition screen. When the “return to menu top” item is selected and determined, the screen returns to the menu top screen. The “Game Flow Screen” has been described as an example included in the “Composition Composition” item, but is not limited to this, and the “Game Flow” item can be selected separately from the “Composition Composition” item on the menu top screen. The screen may be displayed when the “game flow” item is selected and determined.

  When the “production customization” item is selected and determined, the sub CPU 71 displays a production customization screen on the liquid crystal display 27 as a second-level screen. In the effect customization screen, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), the “navigation voice” item, the “costume” item, the “wallpaper” item, the “return to default” item, and the “return to menu top” are displayed as the second hierarchy screen. "Item is displayed.

  The “navigation voice” item is an item for selecting the type of character (the type of sound to be output) when executing an effect that generates sound (for example, a navigation effect). When the “navigation voice” item is selected and determined on the effect customization screen, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), a “character” that can select any one of a plurality of types of characters A to E as the third hierarchy screen. "Item is displayed. Thereby, one of the characters displayed by operating the up / down / left / right switch of the effect operation unit 81 is selected. When selected, the voice of the character is output from the speakers 31L and 31R. When the item selected by operating the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 is determined, the setting information for specifying the character is stored in the RAM 75, and the display of the “character” item is terminated. Return to the second level screen. At this time, by displaying a setting completion message such as “Navivoice set to character XX”, it is possible to inform the player that the setting has been made and the player recognizes that it has been set. Can do. During the game, a navigation effect is executed using the voice data of the set character. Among the “character” items, the “character?” Item is a character that cannot be selected at present, and can be selected after the player reaches a predetermined level by accumulating a game history or the like. Further, during the production customization, not only when the “character” item is displayed, but when the player decides the item on the third layer screen, the second layer screen instead of the first layer screen. Return to. That is, the production customization is continued. Thereby, the player can set another item continuously, and the convenience can be improved.

  The “costume” item is an item for selecting the type of costume of the character. When the “costume” item is selected and determined on the effect customization screen, a “costume” item capable of selecting any one of a plurality of types of costumes A to E is displayed as the third layer screen. Thereby, any one of the costumes displayed by operating the up / down / left / right switch of the effect operation unit 81 is selected. When selected, an image of the costume may be displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. When the item selected by operating the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 is determined, setting information for specifying the costume is stored in the RAM 75, and the item “costume” of the liquid crystal display 27 is stored. The display is terminated and the screen returns to the second layer screen. At this time, by displaying a setting completion message such as “I set it to costume XX”, it is possible to tell the player that the setting has been made, and the player can recognize that it has been set. . During the game, the character is displayed in the costume costume set. The “costume?” Item of the “costume” item is a costume that cannot be selected at present, and can be selected after the player reaches a predetermined level by accumulating a game history or the like.

  As a screen when the “production customization” item is selected and determined, in FIG. 41, when the item is selected and determined in the second layer image (FIG. 41A), the screen is switched to the third layer image. (FIG. 41 (b)), an example has been described in which when an item is selected and determined in the third layer image, the image is returned to the second layer image again (FIG. 41 (a)). However, the screen when the item is selected and determined is not limited to this, and when the item is selected and determined in the second layer image, the second layer image is displayed while the second layer image is displayed. May be displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 41 (c), when the “Navi Voice” item is selected and determined, a “Character” item capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of characters is displayed on the liquid crystal display as the third layer screen. It may be displayed in the display area on the right side of the device 27. Further, as shown in FIG. 41 (d), when the “costume” item is selected and determined, a “costume” item capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of costumes is displayed on the liquid crystal display as the third layer screen. It may be displayed in the display area on the right side of the device 27. In this case, when the item selected by operating the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 is determined, setting information for specifying the character or the costume is stored in the RAM 75, and the right side of the liquid crystal display 27 is displayed. The display of the “character” item or the “costume” item in the display area may be terminated and the screen may return to the second layer screen.

  The “wallpaper” item is an item for selecting the type of an image (frame image or the like) that is fixed to some extent among the backgrounds displayed during the game. When the “wallpaper” item is selected and determined on the effect customization screen, a “wallpaper type” item capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of wallpaper is displayed as the third layer screen. Thus, any type of wallpaper displayed by operating the up / down / left / right switch of the effect operation unit 81 is selected. When selected, the wallpaper image may be displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. When the item selected by operating the decision switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 is determined, setting information for specifying the type of the wallpaper is stored in the RAM 75, and the “wallpaper type” of the liquid crystal display 27 is stored. The display of the item is terminated and the screen returns to the second layer screen. At this time, by displaying a setting completion message such as “I set it as wallpaper ○○”, it is possible to tell the player that the setting has been made, and the player can recognize that it has been set. . During the game, the background is displayed with the set wallpaper.

  The “return to default” item is an item for returning the navigation voice, costume, wallpaper, etc. set in the customization to the default state. When the “return to default” item is selected and determined on the effect customization screen, the setting information stored in the RAM 75 is initialized and a message such as “setting information cleared” is displayed on the effect customization screen. Then, the screen returns to the second layer screen again.

  The “return to menu top” item is an item for returning to the menu top screen. When the “return to menu top” item is selected and determined on the effect customization screen, the effect customization screen is terminated and the menu top screen is displayed.

  In FIG. 40, as the player menu screen, a menu top screen of the first layer, various display screens and effect customization screens of the second layer, and an effect customization screen of the third layer are illustrated. Among these, even when any player menu screen is displayed, the transition to the demonstration screen is made when the predetermined time elapses without the effect operation unit 81 being operated. The player menu screen is a screen for displaying or setting game items for the player. For this reason, the predetermined time is set longer than the specific time set for the administrator menu screen. As a result, settings can be made with a relatively large margin while checking game items at the player's pace.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 operates the bet switch 15 or the maximum bet switch 17 or inserts a medal into the medal insertion slot 25 even when any player menu screen is displayed in the player menu state. When the bet amount is set or the start switch 19 is operated, the player menu screen is ended and the game screen is displayed. Thereby, when the player's intention to start the game is confirmed, the game can be started immediately.

<About power-on processing>
When the power switch 50 is operated from the OFF state to the ON state, power supply to the slot machine 1 is started. When power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the main CPU 61 performs a power-on process shown in FIG.

  In the power-on process, first, in S01, it is determined whether or not the power interruption signal is ON. The power interruption signal is a signal that is turned on until the output voltage from the power supply unit 49 exceeds a predetermined threshold. When it is determined in S01 that the power interruption signal is ON, the process waits as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power interruption signal is not ON, access to the RAM 65 is permitted in S02.

  In S03, a backup failure determination process is performed for the RAM 65. In the backup failure determination process, for example, checksum determination for determining backup failure using the chuck sum value, power failure flag determination for determining abnormal power failure based on the value of power failure flag, and stack pointer range at power failure Stack pointer determination, setting value determination whether the set value is within a predetermined range (1 to 6), internal winning information upper determination whether the internal winning information higher is within the predetermined range, etc. When it is determined to be abnormal, it is determined that the backup state of the RAM 65 is defective, and the RAM error flag is set as error data. The error data is data for specifying the presence or absence of errors that have occurred at various timings.

  In S04, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the door sensor 20 is in the ON state. In a state where the front door 5 is closed with respect to the housing 3, the detection signal from the door sensor 20 is turned on. When it is not determined that the door sensor 20 is in the ON state, the front door 5 is in an open state with respect to the housing 3, so whether or not the change processing start switch 56 is operated in S <b> 05. It is determined whether or not. When it is determined that the change process start switch 56 is in the ON state, a setting change process is performed in S10. The setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S04 that the door sensor 20 is in the ON state, or when it is not determined in S05 that the change process start switch 56 is in the ON state, the result of the RAM backup failure determination process in S03 is obtained in S06. It is determined whether or not it is defective. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a RAM error flag is set. When the RAM error flag is set and it is determined that the error is detected, an error process is performed in S11, and the power-on process is terminated. The error processing will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if the RAM error flag is not set and it is not determined to be defective in S06, it is determined in S07 whether any of the reels 11L to 11R is rotating.

  When it is determined in S07 that any of the reels 11L to 11R is rotating, a reel restart state is set in S08. As a result, a setting is made to restore the reel rotation state to the state before the power was turned off. In S09, a sensor error (EA error) determination process is performed, and the power-on process is terminated. In the sensor error (EA error) determination process, it is determined whether or not the insertion sensor 53 in the medal selector 48 is in the ON state. It is a process for setting as.

  As shown in FIG. 42, during the setting change process in S10, error determination processes such as S06 and S09 are not performed. For this reason, as described above, the main CPU 61 does not execute the error determination process when the setting change process is being executed.

<About timer interrupt processing>
As described above, the main CPU 61 has an interrupt function such as a timer interrupt. The main CPU 61 performs a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 43 every elapse of a predetermined time after completing the power-on process. In the timer interruption process, first, in S15, a phase output process is performed on the reel motors 14L to 14R. Specifically, excitation data for rotating each of the reels 11L to 11R is output to the stepping motors constituting the reel motors 14L to 14R.

  In S16, command transmission processing for transmitting a command from the main CPU 61 side to the sub CPU 71 side in the normal state is performed. In S17, it is determined whether or not the power interruption signal is turned on and the power is turned off. When it is determined that the power is cut off, the power cut-off process is performed in S23. In the power interruption process, a stack pointer, a power interruption flag, a checksum value, and the like are set.

  If it is not determined in S17 that the power is turned off, ramp processing is performed in S18. In the lamp processing, drive control of the lamps / LEDs connected to the main control board 63 is performed. In S19, port input processing is performed. In the port input process, signals from switches and sensors connected to the main control board 63 are input.

  In S20, various sensors are monitored. In the monitoring process of various sensors, for example, a process of monitoring a selector sensor such as the insertion sensor 53 mounted on the selector, a process of monitoring the dispensing sensor 54, and a process of monitoring the detection state of the door sensor 20 are performed. Then, error determination is performed based on detection results of various sensors. When an error is detected, a transmission command when an error occurs is set and various error data are set.

  In S21, it is determined whether or not a transmission command for specifying the error set in the monitoring process in S20 is set. When it is not determined that there is a transmission command, the process proceeds to S24, and when it is determined that there is a transmission command, a transmission command for specifying an error is transmitted from the main CPU 61 side to the sub CPU 71 side in S22. The command transmission process is performed.

  In S24, it is determined whether error data is set. If it is determined in S24 that error data is set, error processing is performed in S25, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated. The error processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined in step S24 that error data has been set, a medal insertion determination is performed in step S26. In S27, a medal payout determination is performed. In S28, timer update processing is performed. In S29, port output processing is performed. In S30, external signal output processing is performed. In the external signal output process, a signal for specifying the occurrence of an error, a signal for specifying the open / closed state of the front door 5 and the like are externally output to a hall computer managed by a game hall manager. In S31, the reels 11L to 11R are controlled, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<About error handling>
Next, error processing executed in S11 of FIG. 42, S25 of FIG. 43, and the like will be described. In the error processing, first, the current gaming state is saved in S35. In S36, an error flag corresponding to the error data is set and transmitted to the sub CPU 71.

  In S37, the contents of the payout display 46 (game medal payout number display) are stored. In S38, an error code is displayed on the payout display 46. In S39, the states of the hopper unit 43 (game medal payout device) and the switching solenoid 51 (cancel coil) are stored. In S40, setting (off state setting) of the hopper unit 43 (game medal payout device) and the switching solenoid 51 (cancellation coil) is performed.

  Subsequently, in S41, it is determined whether or not an E4 error state is present (see S11 in FIG. 42). If it is determined that the state is the E4 error state, the process proceeds to S53 and enters a standby state until the setting change process is performed.

  If it is not determined in S41 that the state is the E4 error state, it is determined in S42 whether or not the state is the E3 error state (hopper empty error). When it is determined that the state is the E3 error state, the process proceeds to S43, and when it is determined that the state is not the E3 error state, the process proceeds to S44.

  In S43, it is determined whether or not the error release sensor is in an on state. Since S43 is a hopper empty error, the error canceling sensor here is a door key reset. The door key reset is established by turning a key (door key) for opening the front door 5 in a direction opposite to the unlocking direction of the front door 5. When it is determined that the error release sensor is in the on state, the process proceeds to S46, and when it is determined that the error release sensor is not in the on state, the process proceeds to S44.

  In S44, it is determined whether or not the reset switch 52 (setting change switch) is in the ON state. When it is determined that the reset switch 52 is in the ON state, the process proceeds to S45, and when it is determined that the reset switch 52 is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to S41.

  In S45, it is determined whether or not the door sensor 20 that is the door open / close sensor of the front door 5 is in the ON state. When it is determined that it is in the on state, the process proceeds to S41, and when it is determined that it is not in the on state, the process proceeds to S46.

  In S <b> 46, it is determined whether or not any of the three selector sensors A, B, and C that constitute the input sensor 53 and the two payout sensors A and B that constitute the payout sensor 54 are on. When it is determined that it is in the on state, the process proceeds to S41, and when it is determined that it is not in the on state, the process proceeds to S47.

  In S47, the state of the hopper unit 43 (game medal payout device) and the switching solenoid 51 (cancellation coil) is returned to the original state. In S48, the error code display is cleared (initialized). In S49, the contents of the payout display 46 (game medal payout number display) are restored. In S50, the game state is returned. In S 51, an error cancellation event (command) is transmitted to the sub CPU 71. In S52, it is determined whether or not a game medal payout start event (command) is transmitted to the sub CPU 71, and the error process is terminated.

<Setting change processing>
Next, the setting change process executed in S10 of FIG. 42 will be described with reference to FIG. When the main CPU 61 starts the setting change process, the main CPU 61 outputs a setting change start command capable of specifying the fact to the sub CPU 71 to execute the setting change process. In the setting change process, first, in S60, it is determined whether or not the RAM backup failure of the main CPU 61 is set. If it is not determined that the backup failure is set, the setting value information is read in S61, and the process proceeds to S65. At this time, the set value is displayed on the payout display 46 functioning as the set value display during the setting change process. The set value display is not limited to a display that allows the display state to be confirmed even when the front door 5 is closed, such as the payout display 46, but is provided on the back side of the front door 5, and the front door 5 The display may not be able to confirm the display state unless is opened. The set value display is not limited to a display that also displays other information, and may be a dedicated display provided only for displaying the set value.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the backup failure is set, “C” is displayed on the payout display 46 in S62, and whether or not the reset switch 52 (setting switch) is turned on in S63. Determined. When it is not determined to be in the on state, the standby state is set. When it is determined to be in the on state, “1” is set as the set value in S64, and the process proceeds to S65.

  In S65, it is determined whether or not the reset switch 52 (setting switch) is turned on. When it is determined that the device is in the on state, the set value is updated in S66. On the other hand, when it is not determined that the switch is in the on state, it is determined in S67 whether or not the start switch 19 is detected. When it is not determined that it has been detected, the process proceeds to S65.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the change has been detected, it is determined in S68 whether or not the change process start switch 56 is in an OFF state. When it is not determined to be in the off state, the standby state is entered. When it is determined to be in the off state, the set value is confirmed (stored in the RAM 65) in S69, and the setting change process is terminated. When the setting change process is performed, the RAM 65 of the slot machine 1 is initialized. Thereby, the E4 error is canceled. Further, when the main CPU 61 ends the setting change process, the main CPU 61 outputs a setting change end command capable of specifying the fact to the sub CPU 71.

<About sub-control unit processing>
When power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the sub CPU 71 performs a sub control unit process shown in FIG. In the sub-control unit process, first, in S900, it is determined whether or not the power is turned on. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the output voltage from the power supply unit 49 is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value. When it is determined in S900 that the power is turned on, predetermined activation processing such as security check and operation check of the liquid crystal display 27 is performed in S901. Thereafter, in S902, processing according to various states is performed.

<About sub-side setting change status processing>
FIG. 47 is a flowchart for explaining the sub-side setting change state process included in the process of S902 in the sub-control unit process. In S910, it is determined whether or not the main CPU 61 side is in the setting change state in which the setting change process is being executed (whether a setting change start command has been received). If it is not determined that the setting is changed in S910, the sub-side setting change state process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S910 that the setting is changed, the display state of the liquid crystal display 27 is controlled to be the basic screen of the administrator menu state. In S911, it is determined whether or not an operation to the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 is detected. When it is determined that an operation on the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 is detected, an administrator menu process is performed in S913. Thereby, an administrator menu screen is displayed.

  In S914, a timeout timer corresponding to the specific time is set. In S915, it is determined whether or not an operation on the effect operation unit 81 has been detected. When it is determined in S915 that an operation on the rendering operation unit 81 has been detected, the process proceeds to S913, and display or setting corresponding to the operation is performed in the administrator menu state. In S914, a timeout timer corresponding to the specific time is reset.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined in S915 that an operation on the effect operation unit 81 has been detected, it is determined in S916 whether or not the timer set in S914 has timed out. If it is not determined in S916 that a timeout has occurred, it is determined in S917 whether the setting change state has ended (whether a setting change end command has been received), that is, whether the setting change processing has ended. If it is not determined in S917 that the setting change state has been completed, the process proceeds to S915. If it is determined in S917 that the setting change state has ended, the sub-side setting change state process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S916 that the time-out has occurred, since the specific time has elapsed without the effect operation unit 81 being operated, the process proceeds to S911. Thereby, the basic screen in the administrator menu state is displayed. After the completion screen in the administrator menu state is displayed in S913, the process proceeds to S911 when the corresponding post-setting time (first to third post-setting time) has elapsed, and the basic in the administrator menu state is set. A screen is displayed.

  Returning to S911, if it is not determined that an operation to the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 has been detected, it is determined in S912 whether the setting change state has ended. If it is not determined in S912 that the setting change state has been completed, the process proceeds to S911. On the other hand, when it is determined in S912 that the setting change state has ended, the sub-side setting change state process ends. In addition, after the administrator menu screen or the basic screen is terminated in the sub-side setting change state process, a demonstration screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27.

<Sub-side game standby processing>
FIG. 48 is a flowchart for explaining a sub-side game standby process included in the process of S902 in the sub-control unit process. In S920, it is determined whether or not it is in a game standby state (when a specific effect is not being executed and from when a game result command is received until a reel rotation start command is received). If it is not determined in S920 that the game standby state is set, the sub-side game standby process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S920 that the game is on standby, a game screen or a demo screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 as shown in FIG. In S921, it is determined whether or not an operation to the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 is detected. When it is determined that an operation to the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 is detected, a player menu process is performed in S923. Thereby, the player menu screen shown in FIG. 40 is displayed. As described above, when the chance button effect is being executed, the player menu screen may not be displayed even if the determination switch 81a is operated.

  In S924, a timeout timer corresponding to a predetermined time is set. In S925, it is determined whether or not an operation on the effect operation unit 81 has been detected. If it is determined in S925 that an operation on the rendering operation unit 81 has been detected, the process proceeds to S923, and display or setting corresponding to the operation is performed as shown in FIG. In S924, a timeout timer corresponding to a predetermined time is reset.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined in S925 that an operation on the rendering operation unit 81 has been detected, it is determined in S926 whether or not the timer set in S924 has timed out. If it is not determined in S926 that a time-out has occurred, it is determined in S927 whether a bet amount is set (BET) or the start switch 19 (start lever) is operated (whether a bet command or a reel rotation start command is received). Determined.

  If it is not determined in S927 that the bet number setting is also made, that the start switch 19 is operated, the process proceeds to S925. When it is determined in S927 that the bet amount is set or the start switch 19 is operated, the sub-side game standby process is terminated. Thereby, the game screen shown in FIG. 40 is displayed. On the other hand, when it is determined in S926 that a time-out has occurred, since the predetermined time has elapsed without the effect operating unit 81 being operated, the process proceeds to S921. Thereby, the demonstration screen shown in FIG. 40 is displayed.

  Returning to S921, if it is not determined that an operation to the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81 has been detected, it is determined in S922 whether the bet amount is set or the start switch 19 is operated. If it is not determined in S922 that the betting number is set or the start switch 19 is operated, the process proceeds to S921. On the other hand, when it is determined in S922 that the bet amount is set or the start switch 19 is operated, the sub-side game waiting process is terminated. Thereby, the game screen shown in FIG. 40 is displayed.

<Sub error notification process>
FIG. 49 is a flowchart for explaining the sub-side error notification processing. In S930, it is determined whether or not a transmission command from the main CPU 61 has been received. The transmission command is a command transmitted in S22 based on the monitoring result in S20 in the timer interrupt process of FIG. If it is not determined in S930 that the transmission command has been received, the sub-side error notification process is terminated.

  When it is determined in S930 that the transmission command is received, it is determined in S931 whether or not the transmission command is a command related to the door state of the front door 5. If it is not determined in S931 that the transmission command is a command related to the door state of the front door 5, an error notification corresponding to the transmission command is performed in S932. Specifically, a sound such as “Error” is output from the speakers 31L and 31R, and an error code such as “E3” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27, for example.

  In S933, it is determined whether an error flag has been received. The error flag is a flag transmitted in S36 of the error processing in FIG. 44 after the error has occurred. When it is determined that the error flag has been received, the corresponding error notification is performed again in S934.

  In S935, it is determined whether an error cancellation event is received. The error cancellation event is an event transmitted in S51 after error cancellation in the error processing of FIG. If it is not determined that an error release event has been received, the standby state is entered and error notification is continued. On the other hand, if it is determined that an error cancellation event has been received, the error notification is cleared (initialized) in S936, and the sub-side error notification processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S931 that the command related to the door state has been received, it is determined in S937 whether or not the front door 5 is in the open state. When it is determined that the front door 5 is in the open state, an error notification is performed in S939, and the sub-side error notification process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is not determined in S937 that the front door 5 is in the open state, this is a time when the front door 5 is in the closed state. Exit.

<Example of effects produced by slot machine 1>
In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, the chance button effect is not started in the period from when the first stop operation is detected to ON until the third stop operation, which is the final stop operation, is detected to be ON. For this reason, the chance button effect that prompts the player to operate the determination switch 81a is not started while the player performs the subsequent stop operation after the first stop operation. As a result, while the subsequent stop operation is accepted after the first stop operation is performed, the flow of the game is not divided, and the second stop operation and the third stop are performed in good rhythm following the first stop operation. It is possible to prevent the stop operation from being hindered.

  Further, the chance button effect is not started in the period from when the betting number setting operation for setting the betting number is detected until the start operation is detected to be ON. For this reason, a chance button effect that prompts the player to operate the decision switch 81a while the player has performed the bet number setting operation but the start operation has not yet been performed and it has not been determined that the game will be performed. Will never start. As a result, for example, it is confirmed whether or not the chance button effect is executed by performing the betting number setting operation. If the chance button effect is not executed, the set bet number is canceled and the game is not executed. It can be prevented from being broken.

  Also, the image corresponding to the chance button effect is displayed in a layer having a higher priority than the layer displaying the image corresponding to the background. For this reason, for example, the processing load is not increased as compared with the case of setting the priority of the image corresponding to the chance button effect according to the type of background. Also, it is not necessary to prepare an image corresponding to the background in which an image corresponding to the chance button effect is embedded. As a result, an image corresponding to the chance button effect can be displayed reliably.

  Further, a chance button effect (including a chance button effect executed during the continuous effect) is executed so that the distribution rate illustrated in FIG. 15 is obtained. For example, when a bonus is awarded in each of the CZ transition lottery, the AT transition lottery, and the extra lottery, or when a bonus is won (the winning time table in FIG. 15A), the CZ It is determined to be a special pattern that becomes a special mode as a mode of chance button effect at a higher rate than when the bonus is not given in the transition lottery or the like (no winning table in FIG. 15B). For this reason, when the chance button effect is started in a special mode, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation for the provision of a privilege.

  In addition, the rate at which the winning notification effect is executed as the operation-corresponding effect is when the third stop operation ON is detected as the start timing of the chance button effect rather than the pattern when the start ON is detected (for example, the winning pattern 3). The pattern (for example, winning pattern 4) is higher. For this reason, when the chance button effect is started when the third stop operation ON is detected, the expectation that the winning notification effect is executed as the operation corresponding effect is higher than when the chance button effect is started when the start stop is detected. Can do. In addition, when the start-on is detected, the expectation that the privilege is given is increased, and it becomes easy to maintain the expectation that the privilege is given until the third stop operation is detected. Can be improved. In addition, since it is easy to execute the winning notification effect at the time of detecting the third stop operation ON, it is easy to specify whether or not a privilege is granted at the time of detecting the third stop operation ON, and the privilege is given. You can give a sharpness to whether or not.

  Further, the ratio at which the chance button effect of the pattern that executes the winning suggestion effect as the operation corresponding effect is started when the start ON is detected (for example, the distribution ratio of the winning pattern 1) is the pattern that executes the winning notification effect as the operation corresponding effect. The chance button effect is determined to be higher than the ratio (for example, the distribution ratio of the winning pattern 4) started when the third stop operation ON is detected. For this reason, since the chance button effect of the pattern in which the winning suggestion effect is executed can be provided when the start ON is detected to increase the expectation, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the chance button effect in the special mode is more effective when the third stop operation is detected (for example, the total allocation of the winning patterns 6 and 8 than when the start ON is detected (for example, the total allocation ratio of the winning patterns 5 and 7). Rate) is high. On the other hand, the chance button effect in the normal mode is when the start ON is detected (for example, the total allocation of the winning patterns 1 and 3) than when the third stop operation ON is detected (for example, the total allocation ratio of the winning patterns 2 and 4). Rate) is high. Therefore, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation that the chance button effect is started in a special manner when the third stop operation ON is detected after the start ON is detected.

  The effect displayed in the standby state, which is a guide effect for guiding to the player menu, displays an image smaller than the chance button effect in the display area near the edge of the liquid crystal display 27. For this reason, in the standby state, it is possible to prevent a guidance effect that prompts an operation to the determination switch 81a from being performed in an excessively expecting manner.

  Moreover, the chance button effect that has been once started is continuously executed even after a period during which the chance button effect can be started, and the operation to the decision switch 81a is effectively accepted. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that would panic the player.

  Further, when the chance button effect is executed, the LED mounted on the operation unit of the determination switch 81a is controlled with a predetermined power consumption regardless of whether or not the eco mode is set as the power consumption mode. That is, even when the eco mode is controlled, the LED mounted on the operation unit of the determination switch 81a is controlled with the same power consumption as that in the normal mode. For this reason, the occurrence of inconveniences such as making it difficult for the player to notice that the chance button effect is being executed and making it difficult to understand the target to be operated regardless of the controlled power consumption mode. Can be prevented.

  Further, the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment has the following effects.

  (1-1) As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, when the cumulative number becomes 2370 and the advantageous period is about to end, an end telop is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27 as a specific effect. As a result, even if the AT ends due to reaching the upper limit of the cumulative number, the fact is notified by the end telop, so it is possible to avoid that the AT has ended unexpectedly, It is possible to prevent mistrust from being held. Further, the display of the net increase number on the liquid crystal display 27 is ended in response to the display of the end telop. As a result, the liquid crystal display 27 displays a net increase number of 2400 or more (or a value obtained by adding the maximum payout number of one game to 2400) while reducing the uncomfortable feeling that the display of the net increase number is terminated during AT. Can be prevented. As a result, the player's gambling feeling can be suppressed.

  (1-2) In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, after the end telop is once displayed based on the cumulative number, it is determined YES in SB11 in FIG. Since the display and the non-display of the net increase number are maintained, the player can be prevented from being confused. In addition, after displaying the end telop, it is not necessary to perform processing according to the cumulative number, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  (1-3) In the end screen after the net increase number is not displayed by displaying the end telop in the slot machine 1 in the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, regardless of the cumulative number thereafter, The net increase is not displayed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the net increase of 2400 or more from being displayed on the end screen. In addition, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that may cause a sense of discomfort by displaying the net increased number on the end screen even though the net increased number is not displayed according to the display of the end telop.

  (1-4) In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, the display of the end telop and the non-display of the net increase number are uniformly performed according to the cumulative number regardless of the net increase number displayed during the AT. Thereby, regardless of the displayed net increase, the AT does not end suddenly, and it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from having distrust. Further, since it is not necessary to perform processing according to the displayed net increase, the processing load can be reduced.

  (1-5) In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, as shown by SB12 in FIG. 19, when the AT is in progress, the cumulative number reaches the same 2370 regardless of whether or not the RBB is in progress. To display the end telop. For this reason, since it is not necessary to perform processing according to whether or not the RBB is in progress, the processing load can be reduced.

  (1-5) In the slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment, as described in the first advantageous period of FIG. 24 and the like, during the RBB controlled when the net increase is not displayed during the AT, Only the net increase in RBB is displayed. Accordingly, it is possible to notify the player of only the net increase number in the RBB while preventing the net increase number of 2400 or more from being displayed as the net increase number related to the AT.

  (1-6) In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, as described in the first advantageous period of FIG. 24, etc., when the controlled RBB ends when the end telop is displayed during AT. The displayed end screen does not display the net increase in the AT, but displays only the net increase in the RBB. Accordingly, it is possible to notify the player of the net increase number as the RBB game history while preventing the net increase number of 2400 or more from being displayed as the AT game history.

  (2-1) In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, on the main CPU 61 side, a plurality of types of game data are updated according to the progress of the game during the advantageous period, and a plurality of types are obtained when the advantageous period ends. The game data is initialized (SA26 in FIG. 12). As a result, it is possible to prevent a plurality of types of game data from being carried over after the advantageous period is over and being used for subsequent game progress. On the other hand, on the side of the sub CPU 71, based on a command from the main CPU 61 for making it possible to specify a plurality of types of game data, a plurality of types of effect data are updated and an effect according to the progress of the game can be executed. Of the plurality of types of effect data when the advantageous period ends, the number-related effect data having a direct relationship with the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period is initialized (SB46 in FIG. 23). . As a result, it is possible to prevent the number-related effect data from being carried over after the advantageous period is over and used for the execution of the effect according to the progress of the game thereafter. For this reason, for example, it is possible to prevent the net increase number that can be specified from the number-related effect data during the advantageous period that has already ended being added to the net increase number of the advantageous period that is currently being controlled. As a result, the player's gambling feeling can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, of the multiple types of effect data, unlike the number-related effect data that has the possibility of encouraging the player's happiness, there is a direct relationship with the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period. The number of unrelated effect data that is not performed is not initialized when the advantageous period ends. For this reason, for example, an effect in consideration of the number-of-number-related effect data before the advantageous period that has already ended can be executed during the advantageous period currently being controlled. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect based on the game history during the advantageous period that has ended within a range that does not detract from the player's excitement, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (2-2) In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, as shown by SB47 and SB48 in FIG. 23, during the AT controlled by winning from the end of the advantageous period until the game is digested 100 times, It is possible to execute an effect in accordance with the number-related unrelated effect data updated before the previous advantageous period. For this reason, the player can have a sense of expectation for newly winning an AT from the end of the advantageous period until the game is consumed 100 times, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (2-3) In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, when the game is digested 100 times without winning the AT from the end of the advantageous period, as shown by SB48 in FIG. It is initialized. As a result, in a situation where the relationship with the previous advantageous period has already declined, the production is executed based on the number-related production data before the advantageous period, and the interest of the game is reduced. The occurrence of such inconvenience can be prevented.

  (2-4) In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29 (e) and the like, the star mark is based on the number of consecutive chunks in the number-of-number-related production data before the previous advantageous period. The number of consecutive chunks can be notified by the number of. Further, as shown in FIG. 30E and the like, it is possible to notify how many stories have progressed based on the number of stories in the number-of-number-related effect data before the previous advantageous period. Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved without encouraging the gambling feeling of the player.

  (3-1) In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, even when the end telop is displayed and the net increase number is not displayed, the game history data for mobile linkage is not shown regardless of the cumulative number. Updated at 23 SB42. As a result, it is possible to generate and display a two-dimensional code that can display, for example, a net increase of more than 2370 or 2400 on the communication terminal. Thus, while controlling the display / non-display of the net increase number in the slot machine 1 while suppressing the player's gambling feeling, the communication terminal owned by the player does not display the net increase number that is not displayed in the slot machine 1 or It is possible to display a net increase number that cannot be displayed and to update the game history of the management server. For this reason, it is possible to respond to a request for reviewing a player's own game history performed in the past and for checking a record of the game history.

  (3-2) In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, the game history data for mobile linkage used for generating the two-dimensional code is not initialized when the advantageous period ends, as shown in FIG. . For this reason, even after the advantageous period ends, the two-dimensional code generated based on the mobile-linked game history data can be generated and reflected on the communication terminal or management server owned by the player. As a result, even after the advantageous period has ended, not only the net increase in number but also other game histories can be displayed on the communication terminal. For this reason, the player can look back and confirm the game history during the advantageous period that has already ended via the communication terminal.

  (4) The slot machine 1 in the above embodiment calculates the net increase in the net increase calculation period from the time when it is controlled to ART until the advantageous period ends by SB03 in FIG. 18 and SB10 in FIG. With SB06 and SB22 in FIG. 19, the net increase in number is displayed during AT or during bonus. Further, until the calculated net increase number reaches the OVER display number of “2000” which is a specific number, the net increase number is displayed in the normal mode shown in FIG. 25, FIG. When the net increase number reaches the OVER display number of “2000”, the net increase number is displayed in a rainbow manner as shown in FIG. 26B, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26C, the net increase number is “2000”. Even when it is less than “,” the display in the rainbow mode is maintained. As a result, after reaching the OVER display number of “2000”, the rainbow mode is displayed regardless of whether or not the net increase number is less than “2000”. As a result, it is possible to grasp whether or not the OVER display number of “2000” has been reached based on whether or not the net increase is displayed in a rainbow manner, and even if the player misses the “2000” OVER display or the like Thereafter, since the net increase in number is displayed in a rainbow manner, it is possible to grasp that the slot machine 1 is operating normally, and it is possible to prevent the slot machine 1 from being distrusted. .

  In addition, the net increase number is continuously calculated even during the bonus that is selected and controlled during the AT, and when the net increase number reaches the OVER display number of “2000” during the bonus, FIG. ), The net increase number is displayed in the rainbow mode, and thereafter, the display in the rainbow mode is maintained even when the net increase number is less than “2000”. As a result, it is possible to have a relationship between AT and bonus in terms of calculating and displaying the net increase, and to improve the fun of the game, and even when controlled by the bonus, the net increase is in a rainbow manner. Whether or not the OVER display number of “2000” has been reached can be grasped based on whether or not it is displayed, and the fact that the slot machine 1 is operating normally can be grasped by displaying the net increase number in a rainbow manner. It is possible to prevent the slot machine 1 from having distrust.

  Further, the number of net increase is continuously calculated even in the RBB internal winning state where the bonus is won. On the other hand, as shown in (b) and (c) of FIG. 28, the display of the net increase is interrupted after the bonus winning confirmation screen is displayed until the bonus is controlled. Thus, when the bonus winning confirmation screen is displayed, it is possible to concentrate the player on winning the winning bonus and controlling the bonus. Further, when the net increase number reaches the OVER display number of “2000” after the bonus winning confirmation screen is displayed until the bonus is controlled, the bonus is controlled as shown in FIG. After the net increase number is displayed in the normal mode, as shown in FIG. 28E, the net increase number is displayed in the rainbow mode when a medal is awarded by a small role winning or the like. As a result, the sudden increase in the number of images displayed in a rainbow manner at the moment when the bonus is controlled, thereby giving a reminder that a special performance (for example, a high setting suggestion) may have been executed. Can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that may confuse the player.

  Also, during the period from when the bonus selection confirmation screen is displayed until the bonus is controlled, even if the net increase number reaches the set OVER display number, the OVER display is not executed and the bonus control is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 28E, the OVER display is executed when a medal is awarded by a small role winning or the like. As a result, when the bonus winning confirmation screen is displayed, the player can be concentrated on winning the bonus that is won and controlled by the bonus, and the OVER display suddenly appears at the moment when the bonus is controlled. By being executed, it is possible to prevent the user from having an impression that a special performance has been executed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that may confuse the player.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 20 and the like, the OVER display is displayed in the normal mode when the net increase number reaches the OVER display number less than “2000”, and when the OVER display number reaches the net increase number of “2000” or more. The OVER display is displayed in a rainbow manner. That is, when the slot machine 1 reaches any one of the predetermined number of stages including the number less than the specified number and the number greater than the specified number when the net increase in the advantageous state reaches the specified number of stages. An arrival effect display means for displaying an arrival effect indicating that the arrival effect has been reached, and the arrival effect display means displays the arrival effect in the predetermined display mode when the net increase reaches the number of steps less than the specific number. When the net increase reaches the number of steps equal to or greater than the specific number, the reaching effect is displayed in the special display mode. Thus, by linking the display mode of the OVER display with the display mode of the net increase number display, it is possible to visually notify the player whether the net increase number is less than “2000” or not.

  When the calculated net increase number does not reach the OVER display number of “2000” and the AT or bonus ends, the end screen is displayed in the normal mode as shown in FIG. When the AT or bonus is ended after the net increase number reaches the OVER display number of “2000”, as shown in FIGS. 26E and 26E, it is less than or equal to “2000”. Regardless, the end screen is displayed in a rainbow manner. That is, the slot machine 1 includes game result display means for displaying a game result including the net increase calculated by the net increase calculation means when the advantageous state ends, and the game result display means has the net increase as a result. When the advantageous state ends without reaching the specific number, the game result is displayed in the predetermined display mode, and when the advantageous state ends after the net increase reaches the specific number, the advantageous state is displayed. The game result is displayed in the special display mode regardless of whether or not the net increase when the game ends has reached the specific number. Thus, by linking the display mode of the end screen with the display mode of the net increase number display, the display mode in which the end screen is different based on the net increase number at the end screen display even though the net increase number display is in the rainbow mode It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that would confuse the player. In addition, since it is not necessary to change the display mode of the end screen according to the net increase in number when the end screen is displayed, the processing load when the end screen is displayed can be reduced.

  In addition, the display form of the net increase number when the OVER display number of “2000” is reached, regardless of whether the state at the time of arrival is AT, bonus, or confirmation screen display, FIG. As shown in FIGS. 27 (d) and 28 (e), this is a common rainbow mode. That is, in the slot machine 1, the special display mode among the display modes of the net increment is the same display mode regardless of the state when the net increment reaches the specific number. As a result, it is possible to prevent the storage capacity of the display data used for displaying the net increase number from reaching the OVER display number of “2000” from being extremely increased.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 26B to 26D and the like, after reaching the OVER display number of “2000” and displaying the OVER display of “2000”, the net increase number is “2000”. Even when the value reaches “2000” again after reaching less than “2000”, the “OVER” display of “2000” is not performed again. On the other hand, after displaying the net increase number display in the rainbow mode, does it become less than “2000”? Regardless of whether or not, the display in the rainbow mode is maintained. That is, the slot machine 1 includes a specific number reaching effect display means for displaying a specific number reaching effect when the net increase in the advantageous state reaches the specific number, and the specific number reaching effect display means is the net increasing effect display means. After the number reaches the specific number and displays the specific number reaching effect, the specific number reaching effect is displayed even when the net increase is less than the specific number and reaches the specific number again. Without displaying again, the net increase display means determines whether the net increase is less than the specific number after the net increase reaches the specific number and the net increase is displayed in the special display mode. Regardless, the display in the special display mode is maintained. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably notify the player whether or not “2000” has been reached by the display mode of the net increase number display while preventing the “OVER” display of “2000” from occurring frequently in a short period of time. .

  Further, as display data used for displaying the net increase in number, display data in a normal mode and display data in a rainbow mode are stored in the ROM 77 in advance. As for the display data for OVER display, display data in a normal mode with a net increase of less than “2000” and display data in a rainbow mode with a net increase of “2000” or more are stored in advance in the ROM 77, respectively. Yes. For this reason, it is not necessary to generate rainbow display data by image processing, so that the image processing burden can be reduced.

  (5) As shown in FIG. 33 and the like, the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment displays a warning during the ending background display for advantageous state termination. However, as shown in FIG. 32, attention is displayed in a layer having a higher priority than the ending background. The caution display is performed until a predetermined time (3 seconds) elapses. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the caution display from being hindered by the ending background.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 35 (c), (d), (g), and (i), a navigation effect, a history display, Dialog display (first stage), error notification, etc. are performed. However, as shown in FIG. 32B, the specific display is performed in a region that does not overlap with the region used for the caution display. Therefore, the specific display can be performed while preventing the caution display from being hindered by the specific display. As a result, it is possible for the player to fully view the alerting function during the attention display so that the player can visually recognize the attention display, and to provide information corresponding to the type of specific display to the player or the store clerk at the game hall, etc. Can be surely notified.

  Further, since the suggestion display is an image that suggests the advantage of the slot machine 1 and is an image that draws attention to the player, when a caution display and a suggestion display are displayed, as shown in FIGS. First, a suggestion display is performed, and then a caution display is performed. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the attention display from being overlooked by paying attention to the suggestion display as compared with the display of the attention display and the suggestion display at the same time. As a result, while the caution display is being performed, the player can fully view the caution display function by visually recognizing the caution display, and improve the interest of the game by suggesting the advantage by the suggestion display. Can be made.

  Further, when the advantageous state ends, the player has obtained a relatively large number of medals in the advantageous state. During the ending background display under such circumstances, a caution display is performed. For this reason, the alerting function can be exhibited in an effective scene.

  Further, the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment starts the caution display as shown in FIG. 35 (c), and then ends the caution display as shown in FIGS. 35 (d), (g), and (i). Until then, the display mode (predetermined mode) from the beginning of display is maintained. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the caution display from being overlooked, as compared with the case where the display mode of the caution display changes (movement of the display position, etc.) in the middle.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, it is assumed that an operation (betting number setting, start switch 19 operation) for starting a game is performed as shown at timing 6 in FIGS. In addition, the caution display is maintained until a predetermined time elapses. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the caution display from being overlooked, as compared with the case where the caution display is changed (movement of the display position, etc.) when the game operation is accepted.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 32 etc., the slot machine 1 in the said embodiment is displayed in the area | region where a warning display and a suggestion display differ. For this reason, since the caution display is performed in a region different from the region where the suggestion display has been performed, it is possible to make the player easily notice that the display content has changed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the caution display from being overlooked.

  (6) As shown in S700 of FIG. 5 and FIG. However, whether or not the main CPU 61 reaches the remaining upper limit number of games before consuming the remaining number of AT games, as shown in the SA04 of FIG. 9 and the additional lottery column in FIG. 37, during the AT. Regardless of whether or not the additional lottery condition is satisfied, the additional lottery is performed uniformly. For example, even if the number of remaining AT games has already exceeded the remaining upper limit number of games, when the additional lottery condition is satisfied, the additional lottery is performed in the same manner as when the remaining AT game number does not exceed the remaining upper limit number of games. I do. Further, when the upper limit number of advantageous periods is reached, the AT and the advantageous period are terminated. As a result, there is no processing step for determining whether or not the remaining upper limit game number is reached before the remaining AT game number is consumed, so the processing load and storage capacity on the main CPU 61 side is increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessive increase in gambling by setting an upper limit for the AT and the advantageous period.

  On the other hand, on the side of the sub CPU 71, predetermined effects including an extra effect and a special background are controlled depending on whether or not the remaining upper limit game number is reached before the remaining AT game number is consumed. . As a result, it is possible to execute effects according to the gaming situation during the AT and the advantageous period, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, as shown in FIG. 37 and the like, when the period controlled by the AT is actually extended, an extra effect is executed, and the period controlled by the AT is actually reached by reaching the upper limit number of advantageous periods. When it is not extended, the production effect is restricted. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the AT ends due to reaching the upper limit number of advantageous periods, even though the number of AT games notified by the extra effect is not consumed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9, the main CPU 61 outputs an additional game number command, a remaining AT game number command, and a remaining upper limit game number command for each game. Further, the remaining AT game number specified from the remaining AT game number command includes the added game number added in the game. As a result, the sub CPU 71 that receives the command determines whether or not the upper limit number of advantageous periods has been reached before the remaining number of AT games is consumed, including the number of additional games this time. Therefore, it is possible to determine the presence or absence of the production more accurately.

  Further, during the bonus controlled by winning the bonus until the AT is over, as described in SA01 and SA02 of FIG. 9, the remaining AT game number is not subtracted and updated (consumed), while the remaining upper limit game number is not controlled. Subtract update (consumption). As a result, even if the bonus is controlled by the end of the AT, the period controlled by the AT is substantially shortened by the bonus and the player is disadvantaged. On the other hand, since the upper limit number of advantageous periods is not substantially extended, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from being excessively increased.

  (7) In the slot machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the player menu screen is ended without operating the production operation unit 81 during a specific time for the administrator menu screen to be completed without the production operation unit 81 being operated. It is set shorter than the predetermined time. For this reason, for example, when the administrator menu screen is displayed, if another operation is entered and the administrator leaves it without any operation, or forgets that the administrator menu screen is displayed, the game hall is opened. Even in the case where it has been made, the administrator menu screen can be terminated at an earlier timing than when the player menu screen is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the administrator sees the administrator menu screen that should be confirmed and set only by the administrator. On the other hand, the player menu screen is displayed longer than the administrator menu screen even if the production operation unit 81 is not operated. Therefore, the player menu screen has a relatively large margin while checking the game items at the player's pace. Can be set. That is, it is possible to provide a slot machine that can reduce the possibility that the administrator menu screen will be seen by the player while allowing the display on the player menu screen to be checked with a margin.

  In addition, after the administrator menu screen is terminated after the elapse of a specific time, the display state of the liquid crystal display 27 is controlled to the basic screen (black screen). In this way, the display state is controlled such that it is impossible to grasp or predict the management item displayed immediately before the administrator menu screen is terminated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing what management items the administrator has confirmed or intended to set.

  In addition, when management items such as sub-clear and date / time settings are set on the administrator menu screen, the completion screen is displayed, and then the LCD is displayed when the post-setting time determined for the set management item has elapsed. The display state of the display 27 is controlled to the basic screen (black screen). Thereby, the completion screen is not displayed indefinitely. As a result, it is possible to prevent the set management item from being specified by the player even after the management item is set on the administrator menu screen. Further, the post-setting time is set shorter than the specific time. For this reason, possibility that a completion screen will be specified by a player can be reduced.

  Further, the post-setting time is set to be different depending on the set management item. For this reason, the administrator menu screen can be terminated when the time corresponding to the type of the set management item has elapsed. The post-setting time is determined according to the time required for storing / processing the information of the setting item (for example, longer than the time required for storing / processing). For this reason, it is possible to prevent a problem such that the internal setting is not yet completed even though the completion screen is completed, and the administrator can be relieved by displaying the completion screen.

  A completion screen is displayed when management items are set. As a result, compared with the case where it is unclear whether or not the setting has been made because the completion screen is not displayed, it may cause a trouble of reconfirming whether or not the administrator has been set. Can be prevented.

  In addition, an administrator who displays and sets management items on the administrator menu screen generally manages a plurality of slot machines installed in a game arcade. For this reason, it can be expected that the management work becomes a flow work. In this case, there is a possibility that it becomes unclear which number of management items have been set, the setting change process has been completed, and the like. In consideration of such a situation, in the slot machine 1, the display state of the liquid crystal display 27 is different depending on whether the administrator menu screen has been completed normally or when it has been completed after a specific time. That is, in the slot machine 1, not only when the production operation unit 81 is not operated but also when a specific time has elapsed, the change process start switch 56 is turned OFF after the start switch 19 is operated, and the setting change process is completed. Sometimes the display of the administrator menu screen is terminated. However, when the display of the administrator menu screen is finished after the specific time has passed without the production operation unit 81 being operated, the display state of the liquid crystal display 27 is controlled to be the basic screen (black screen). On the other hand, when the setting change process is completed, a demonstration screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 27. For this reason, even under the circumstances as described above, by confirming the display state of the liquid crystal display 27, it is possible to grasp whether or not the administrator menu screen has been terminated normally by terminating the setting change process. . As a result, although the administrator menu screen has been completed, the game process hall may be opened in a state where the change process start switch 56 is not turned OFF and the setting change process has not been completed normally. Can be prevented in advance.

  In addition, since the administrator menu screen needs to be shifted to the setting change process as a premise, the player cannot easily check it. As shown in FIG. 39, the display timing and the end timing of the player menu screen can be established by a common operation such as an operation to the determination switch 81a of the effect operation unit 81. On the other hand, no common operation is provided for the display trigger and the end trigger of the administrator menu screen. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator menu screen from being terminated due to an erroneous operation and degrading the management work efficiency.

  Further, when the management item is set on the administrator menu screen, the screen always returns to the basic screen, but even if the game item is set on the player menu screen, the display of the player menu screen is maintained. This improves the convenience of the player by reducing the possibility that the administrator menu screen will be seen by the player while allowing other game items to be set continuously for the player menu screen. Can do.

  Further, when an error occurs on the sub CPU 71 side while the administrator menu screen is displayed, error notification is given priority over the administrator menu screen. For this reason, while the administrator menu screen is being displayed, the management operation can be continued without being affected by the error on the main CPU 61 side. On the other hand, when an error occurs on the sub CPU 71 side that controls the display of the administrator menu screen itself, By giving priority to error notification, it is possible to prevent the administrator menu screen from being continuously displayed in a state where there is a possibility that the management items cannot be normally displayed or set.

<Modification>
The above embodiment should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims. Below, the change with respect to embodiment is illustrated.

  In the above embodiment, an example has been described in which the chance button effect is started when the start operation is detected ON or when the third stop operation is detected ON. However, the chance button effect is not limited to this as long as it starts in at least one of the period from the start operation detection to the first stop operation detection and the third stop operation detection to the bet number setting operation detection. For example, it may start in either the period from the start operation detection to the first stop operation detection or the third stop operation detection to the bet number setting operation detection. The chance button effect may be started when the start operation is detected to be OFF or when the third stop operation is detected to be OFF (when the pressing operation is completed). 3. It may be started when a predetermined time has elapsed since the stop operation was detected. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start operation or the third stop operation has been detected, if the first stop operation after the start operation or the bet number setting operation after the third stop operation has already been detected, the chance button effect is displayed. You may control not to start.

  The chance button effect in the embodiment and the modified example has been described with respect to an example that is executed in a game in which a predetermined condition is satisfied, that is, an example that is executed in the game. A game (for example, how many games) in which the chance button effect is executed may be determined and executed in the game. That is, whether or not to execute the chance button effect and the game to be executed may be determined in advance, and the chance button effect may be executed when the game is reached.

  The chance button effect in the embodiment and the modified example is once started in the period from the start operation detection to the first stop operation detection and the period from the third stop operation detection to the bet number setting operation detection. An example has been described in which the program is continuously executed even after the operation has been completed and terminated by operating the decision switch 81a. However, after the chance button effect is started, the period from the start operation detection to the first stop operation detection or the period from the third stop operation detection to the bet number setting operation detection is determined even if the determination switch 81a is not operated. The process may be ended by ending, when a predetermined time elapses after the period ends, or when a predetermined time elapses after the chance button effect is started.

  In the above-described embodiment and the modified examples, one type each of the normal mode and the special mode is illustrated as the mode of the chance button effect. Also, a plurality of special modes may be provided. Moreover, although the start timing of the chance button effect has been described with respect to an example in which it is started at a common timing (for example, the timing when the target operation is detected to be ON) regardless of the mode, the present invention is not limited to this, and the mode of the chance button effect is not limited to this. Depending on the situation, it may be started at a different timing. For example, the start timing of the chance button effect in the normal mode is started when the target operation is detected to be ON, whereas the start timing of the chance button effect in the special mode is OFF when the target operation is OFF. You may make it start at the detected timing.

  In the said embodiment and modification, with reference to FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, the example in which a chance button effect was performed twice in one continuous effect was demonstrated as a pattern of a continuous effect. However, the pattern of the continuous effect may include a pattern in which the chance button effect is performed once during one continuous effect, or a pattern that is performed three or more times. If the chance button effect is performed a plurality of times during the continuous effect, the chance button effect for executing the winning suggestion effect after the chance button effect for executing the winning notification effect is executed is not required. For example, as shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, the pattern is not limited to the pattern configured to execute the chance button effect for executing the winning notification effect after executing the chance button effect for executing the winning effect effect, It may include a pattern configured only by chance button effects for executing a winning suggestion effect or a pattern configured only by chance button effects for executing a winning notification effect. Further, when the chance button effect is performed a plurality of times during the continuous effect, the chance button effect of the normal mode may be executed after the chance button effect of the special mode is executed. For example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 17, a pattern that executes only the chance button effect in the normal mode, a pattern that executes the chance button effect in the special mode after executing the chance button effect in the normal mode, as shown in FIG. 17, only the chance button effect in the special mode It may include a pattern for executing.

  In addition, the type and timing of the chance button effect executed during the continuous effect has been described with reference to an example in which the chance button effect is determined in advance according to the pattern of the continuous effect. However, the type and timing of the chance button effect executed during the continuous effect is not limited to this. You may make it perform lottery about the kind in the case of performing, and perform a chance button effect according to the said lottery result. Even in this case, if the chance button effect is performed a plurality of times during the continuous effect, the chance button effect for executing the winning suggestion effect is not executed after the chance button effect for executing the winning notification effect is executed, And the lottery regarding a chance button effect may be performed so that the chance button effect of a normal mode may not be performed after the chance button effect of a special mode is performed.

  In the above embodiment, an example has been described in which the end telop is displayed and the net increase is not displayed when it is determined in SB12 of FIG. 19 that the cumulative number is 2370 or more. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the cumulative number reaches 2370 or more, the net increase number is continuously displayed. Alternatively, for example, when the maximum payout number of one game is added, the update display of the net increase number may be stopped when the cumulative number becomes equal to or greater than the value reaching the upper limit cumulative number (2400). Further, not only the cumulative number but also the displayed net increase number itself may be stopped when the displayed net increase number itself reaches the upper limit cumulative number (2400). When the maximum payout number of games is added, the update display of the net increase number may be stopped when the maximum cumulative number (2400) is reached. Further, when the update display of the net increase number is stopped, an image indicating that the upper limit has been reached in a layer that has a higher priority than the layer displaying the net increase number and overlaps with the net increase number (for example, “OVER” or A message image such as “LIMIT” may be displayed.

  FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining a display example when the update display of the net increase number is stopped by reaching the upper limit cumulative number. FIG. 50A shows a state in which the cumulative number and the net increase in both during AT have reached “2396”. FIG. 50 (a) shows an example in which the cumulative number and the net increase number are the same value. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the maximum payout number of one game is added, the upper limit cumulative number ( 2400) may be another value (for example, “1600” or the like). FIG. 50 (b) shows the total number and the net increase in the game after the bet amount is set in the state shown in FIG. 50 (a), in which the small payout is won and the maximum payout number of one game is added. Both show an example of display when the upper limit cumulative number is reached. As shown in FIG. 50B, the update of the net increase number is stopped at “2400”, and a message image “OVER” is displayed in a layer having a higher priority than the net increase number display. As a result, it is possible to prevent a numerical value exceeding the upper limit “2400” (a value obtained by adding the maximum payout number of one game to 2400) from being displayed as a net increase, and that the upper limit cumulative number has been reached. Can be notified.

  Further, when the update display of the net increase number is stopped when the total number or the net increase number reaches the upper limit total number, the display mode of the net increase number is changed (for example, the display color of the image is changed (grayed out, etc.)). It may be. FIG. 50C shows a display example when the display mode of the net increase number is changed to a translucent mode (shown lightly in FIG. 50C). As described above, even when the cumulative number is 2370 or more and the net increase number is continuously displayed, the end telop may be displayed when it is determined that the cumulative number is 2370 or more. The end telop itself may not be displayed.

  In the above embodiment, of the production data, the number-related production data may be carried over until the game is consumed 100 times after the advantageous period ends, and may be carried over thereafter on condition that the AT is won within the period. A possible example has been described. However, the period for carrying over the non-number-related production data is not limited to the period in which the game is consumed 100 times. In addition, the conditions for carrying over even after the period of carrying over the number-related production data is not limited to AT winning within the period, for example, AT winning within the period and being controlled by the AT, It may be controlled to the advantageous period again within the period, controlled to the advantageous period and controlled to CZ within the period, and the like.

  In the embodiment and the modification described above, the game history data for mobile linkage has been described as being continuously updated and carried over without being initialized until the mobile linkage ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game history data for mobile interlocking may be determined with a carry-over period as in the case of the non-number-related production data. The game history data for mobile linkage may also be carried over until the game is consumed 100 times after the advantageous period ends, for example. In addition, conditions for carrying over even after the period of carrying over game history data for mobile linkage are, for example, AT winning within the period, AT winning within the period and being controlled by the AT, It may be controlled again in the advantageous period, controlled in the advantageous period and controlled in the CZ within the period, and the like.

  In the said embodiment and modification, the example which displays a confirmation screen by RBB winning was demonstrated. However, when RBB is won during the display of the end telop, the end telop display may be continued without displaying the confirmation screen, or the confirmation screen may be displayed while continuing the end telop display. Then, the confirmation screen may be displayed. Further, when the condition for displaying the end telop is satisfied during the confirmation screen display, the confirmation screen display may be terminated and the end telop may be displayed, or the end telop may be displayed while continuing the confirmation screen display. Good. Also, in the confirmation screen, the example of notifying the winning RBB symbol in FIG. 27B (also referred to as winning RBB notification) has been described, but the winning RBB notification display area is one of the display areas of the end telop. It may overlap with the part. Even in this case, it is only necessary that both the display of the end telop and the display of the winning RBB notification are displayed so as to be recognized or specified by the player.

  In the embodiment and the modification described above, the example in which the OVER display is not executed during the display of the end telop even when the OVER display number that has been set as the net increase number is reached has been described. However, even when the end telop is displayed and the net increase number is not displayed, when the internally updated net increase number reaches the set OVER display number, the corresponding OVER display is executed. You may make it do. As shown in FIG. 20, since the OVER display number is determined to be less than 2400, even if the OVER display is executed, a net increase of 2400 or more is not displayed.

  In the above embodiment and the modification, as shown in FIG. 29, FIG. 30 and the like, the net increase number is not displayed when the end telop based on the cumulative number is displayed, but the AT game number is continuously displayed. The example to display was demonstrated. However, when the end telop based on the cumulative number is displayed, not only the net increase number but also the AT game number may be hidden. In other words, when the end telop is displayed, information regarding the progress of the game may not be displayed at all. Also, when displaying the end telop based on the number of games, the net increase number may be hidden, and both the net increase number and the AT game number may be hidden.

  In the embodiment and the modification described above, the end telop has been described as being displayed continuously until the advantageous period ends once the display is started. However, when the RBB is won and the RBB is started during the display of the end telop, the end telop display may be ended and an effect corresponding to the RBB may be started.

  In the above-described embodiment and the modification, the example is described in which the AT is controlled only once in one advantageous period, and when the AT ends, the advantageous period is also ended and the normal period is controlled. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the AT may be controlled a plurality of times in one advantageous period. For example, after the AT is over, it is controlled to CZ, and when the AT is won in the CZ, the AT is controlled again. May be terminated and controlled in a normal period. Further, in the case where the AT can be controlled a plurality of times in one advantageous period, for example, the period of carrying over the number-related unrelated effect data is 100 times after the AT ends even in the one advantageous period. It may be limited to the period of digestion. In other words, when the game is not controlled again by the game from the end of the AT until the game is consumed 100 times, the non-related number of effect data may not be carried over thereafter even within one advantageous period.

  In the embodiment and the modification, the end telop display based on the cumulative number ends when the cumulative number exceeds 2400. That is, the end telop display is not ended in advance. For example, if the maximum number of payouts (12) in one game is a cumulative number exceeding 2400 and the end telop display is ended when the “BEL” winning game is started, the player's operation Depending on the mode, the cumulative number may not exceed 2400, and it becomes necessary to display the end telop again. It is possible to prevent such a useless process from being performed and a display that causes a sense of incongruity from being performed. Note that the end telop display based on the cumulative number is a cumulative number exceeding 2400 with the addition of the maximum payout number (12) in one game, and when it is determined that the game will be operated in the correct procedure in the game where “BEL” is won. The display mode may be changed when it is determined that the operation is performed according to the correct answer procedure (the message is switched to a message such as “having reached the upper limit of 2400 advantageous periods”). The end telop display may be ended after changing the display mode when the cumulative number exceeds 2400, for example. For example, when the cumulative number exceeds 2400 during the display of the end telop, the display of the end telop may be ended after switching to a message such as “the upper limit of 2400 has been reached for the advantageous period”. Further, the end telop may be ended when the third stop operation is released in the game in which the end condition is satisfied.

  In the embodiment and the modification described above, the example in which the special background is set when the number of remaining AT games is equal to or greater than the remaining upper limit number of games in SB55 of FIG. However, the condition for setting the special background is, alternatively or in addition, by multiplying the number of remaining AT games by the average net increase per game during the AT calculated from the winning probability of the combination. “Predicted net increase number” is calculated, and it is determined whether or not “Predicted net increase number” is equal to or greater than “(Upper limit 2400) − (Current cumulative number)”, and “Predicted net increase number” ≧ “(Upper limit 2400 )-(Cumulative number at the present time) ", the process may proceed to SB58 to set a special background.

  In the embodiment and the modified example, when the RBB is won and the RBB is controlled during the end telop display based on the cumulative number, the end telop display may be ended when the RBB is controlled. The end telop display may be ended when the advantageous period ends. Also, during RBB, as shown in FIG. 24, even when the end telop is displayed, information about the net increase in the RBB is displayed, but when the end telop is displayed. Information regarding the net increase in the RBB may not be displayed. Further, in the end screen when the controlled RBB is ended during the display of the end telop based on the cumulative number, an example of displaying information related to the net increase number in the RBB has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. On the end screen, no information regarding the net increase number or the like may be displayed.

  When displaying the end telop based on the cumulative number in the embodiment and the modification, a notice effect indicating the possibility of displaying the end telop may be executed. As the notice effect, for example, a message such as “the upper limit 2400 may be reached soon” may be displayed. In addition, the notice effect may be executed when the current cumulative number reaches a predetermined value (for example, 2350) that is smaller than the value of the cumulative number that triggers the display of the end telop, for example. Thereby, the possibility that the end telop is displayed can be notified, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused. Further, the same effect as the notice effect may be executed by winning a predetermined lottery even when the cumulative number is a value less than a predetermined value. Thereby, when the same effect as the notice effect is executed, it is possible to make the player feel excited that the advantageous period may end when the upper limit is reached.

  In the embodiment and the modification described above, the example in which the value that triggers the display of the end telop based on the cumulative number is set to 2370 has been described. However, the value that triggers the display of the end telop based on the cumulative number is a plurality of values (for example, 2000, 2100, 2200, 2300, 2370, etc.) every time it is controlled during the advantageous period or every time it is controlled by the AT. You may make it determine by random number lottery. Regardless of which value is determined, the end telop display mode (message content, etc.) may be the same mode. As a result, even after the end telop is displayed, the value until reaching the upper limit is different, so that the AT can be expected to continue.

  In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment and the modification, the example in which the effect data and the game history data stored by the advantageous period, the end of the mobile link, and the like are initialized has been described. However, the slot machine 1 may update analysis data for specifying all the game histories performed in the slot machine 1 separately from the effect data and the game history data. The analysis data is, for example, data that a manufacturer or the like collects the slot machine 1 and uses it only for analysis, and cannot be used for the progress of the game of the slot machine 1 or the execution of effects.

  In the above-described embodiment and the modification, the example used when determining the type and content of the effect to be executed during the next advantageous period or AT based on the number-of-related effect data carried over after the advantageous period ends has been described. However, not only during the next advantageous period or AT, but based on the number-related unrelated effect data carried over after the advantageous period ends, the type and content of the effect to be executed in the normal period, advantageous general, and CZ are determined. Also good.

  In the embodiment and the modification described above, the example in which the number-related effect data is carried over after the end of the advantageous period has been described. However, the non-number-related effect data may be carried over after the end of the advantageous period only when the game history in the ended advantageous period satisfies the special conditions. The special condition may be, for example, a condition that is satisfied when the story reaches 15 episodes, the premium effect is executed, or the net increase number is a predetermined number (for example, 500) or more.

  In the above embodiment and the modification, the example in which the game history data for mobile interlocking is not used when determining the type and content of the effect to be executed has been described. In addition, the type and content of the effect to be executed may be determined using the game history data for mobile interlocking.

  In the above embodiment and the modification, the example in which the net increase number is not displayed according to the display of the end telop has been described. However, the display is not limited to the non-display. It is also possible to display an item image or the like corresponding to the net increase in number.

  In the embodiment and the modification described above, the example in which the contents of the effect to be executed during the next advantageous period (AT) is determined in accordance with the number-related unrelated effect data that is not initialized when the advantageous period ends. The effect to be determined is not limited to the display effect executed by displaying on the liquid crystal display 27, but may be a light effect executed by a lamp or LED, and is a sound effect output from the speakers 31L and 31R. There may be.

  In the embodiment and the modification described above, the example in which the number of stories in the story advances as the game progresses as an effect during the AT has been described. However, the performance during the AT is not limited to this. For example, the performance may be a performance in which a fighting battle is performed and the number of rounds advances according to the progress of the game. An ending effect that is executed only when the number of AT games reaches 1,000, etc.) may be executed. In such a case, the data specifying the number of rounds and the presence / absence of the ending effect is updated as the non-number-related effect data, and the effect corresponding to the number of rounds and the presence / absence of the ending effect after the advantageous period ends. May be executed. For example, when an ending effect is being executed, an image imitating a trophy may be displayed during an AT in the next advantageous period.

  In FIG. 31 in the above embodiment and the modified example, the example in which the AT net increase number itself is displayed on the display unit of the communication terminal owned by the player based on the game history data for mobile linkage has been described. An image corresponding to the AT pure increase number (for example, one dollar box image corresponding to 100 sheets) may be displayed.

(A) When Carrying Over Production Data Directly Relating to Medals In the above embodiment, “2400” is the upper limit value of the cumulative number as the net increase in number during the advantageous period notified on the liquid crystal display 27 or the like. ”Is ended when the upper limit value of the cumulative number during the advantageous period is reached soon (cumulative number reaches“ 2370 ”) in order not to notify more than the value obtained by adding the maximum payout number of one game. A description has been given of an example in which a telop is displayed, and every time the advantageous period ends, effect data having a direct relationship with the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period is initialized in SB46 of FIG. However, this is not limited to this as long as the value obtained by adding the maximum payout number of one game to “2400” which is the upper limit value of the cumulative number is not notified, for example, when the advantageous period has ended. However, effect data (for example, cumulative number, net increase number, etc.) having a direct relationship with the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period may be carried over later without being initialized. The type and content of the effect to be executed may be determined based on the effect data and executed. For example, when the cumulative number (or net increase) in the advantageous period does not reach “2400” (or “2370”), the presentation data has a direct relationship with the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period. (For example, the total number, the net increase number, etc.) may be carried over later without being initialized. Even in this case, as shown by SB47 and SB48 in FIG. 23, when the game is digested 100 times without winning the AT from the end of the previous advantageous period, the effect data inherited from the previous advantageous period is initialized. However, it may not be reflected in subsequent productions by not carrying over. In the following, an example will be described in which production data having a direct relationship with the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period is subsequently taken over.

-Example of reflecting in the net increase number display An example of taking over the net increase number during the previous advantageous period will be described. FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining an example of increase / decrease of the cumulative number counter and the net increase in the advantageous period. In FIG. 51, the vertical axis shows a slump graph in which the type of controlled period, the cumulative number counter, the end telop, the net increase number, and the net increase number are graphed from the top, and the horizontal axis shows from the left. The passage of time (digesting games) is shown on the right. In FIG. 51, after the first advantageous period (referred to as the first advantageous period in FIG. 51) ends, the advantageous period again (referred to as the second advantageous period in FIG. 51) when a predetermined period has elapsed. The case of being controlled is shown as an example.

  First, when the normal period is controlled to the advantageous period (first advantageous period), as shown in SA01 in FIG. 9 and SA12 and SA14 in FIG. The value of is updated. In the first advantageous period of FIG. 51, an example is shown in which control is performed during the advantageous period and controlled by the AT. When controlled in AT (net increase number calculation period), as shown in SB03 in FIG. 18 and SB10 in FIG. 19, the net increase number is updated according to the progress of the game. During AT, for example, a navigation effect is executed at the time of pressing the push order bell, so the value of the cumulative number counter increases, and the net increase number and the net increase number as shown in the slump graph also increase. Further, during AT, as shown in SB06 in FIG. 18 and SB22 in FIG. 19, the net increase number is updated and displayed on the liquid crystal display 27.

  In FIG. 51, according to the progress of the subsequent game, when the game is consumed 500 times and the cumulative number and the net increase number reach “900”, the first advantageous period ends and the normal period is controlled. The case is shown. When the first advantageous period ends, the game data during the first advantageous period is initialized, while the processing of SB45 and SB46 of FIG. 23 is not performed, so that the payout is made during the first advantageous period. Production data (production data managed on the sub CPU 71 side) including production data having a direct relationship with the number of medals is subsequently taken over. Production data including production data having a direct relationship with the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period, provided that the cumulative number (or net increase) has not reached the upper limit of “2400”. When the cumulative number (or net increase) has reached the upper limit of “2400”, the production data having a direct relationship with the number of medals paid out at least during the advantageous period is subsequently obtained. You may make it not take over.

  In FIG. 51, it is assumed that the period is controlled again to the advantageous period (referred to as the second advantageous period in FIG. 24) until the game is consumed a predetermined number of times (100) after being controlled in the normal period. In the present modification, the net increase number inherited from the first advantageous period is updated in accordance with the progress of the game even during the normal period. In the second advantageous period, it is controlled to the advantageous general and CZ for a predetermined period, and then controlled to the AT. When controlled during the advantageous period, even if the net increase is taken over, the values of the advantageous period counter and the cumulative number counter are newly updated as the game progresses. Even if it is controlled during the advantageous period, the navigation effect is not executed during advantageous general or CZ, so the cumulative number counter becomes 0 or a negative value, and “0” is set as indicated by SA16 in FIG. In addition, as shown in the slump graph, the net increase in the number is reduced in the same way as in the normal period in the general advantage and CZ.

  In the second advantageous period of FIG. 51, it is assumed that after the general advantage and CZ, the AT is controlled. When controlled by the AT, it is updated and displayed from the net increased number of sheets that has been updated from the first advantageous period. It should be noted that the display may be updated and displayed from the net increase number inherited from the first advantageous period by performing AT winning or AT control until the predetermined number of (100) games are consumed after being controlled in the normal period. In FIG. 51, since 150 medals are consumed and controlled by the AT from the end of the first advantageous period, the net increase number is updated and displayed from “750” (= 900−150) on the liquid crystal display 27.

  In FIG. 51, as the subsequent game progresses, the cumulative number in the advantageous period does not reach the upper limit value, and the net increase number updated from the first advantageous period exceeds, for example, “2090”. The case where the value of the advantageous period counter becomes 5 or less is shown. When the value of the advantageous period counter becomes 5 or less, as shown by SB12 to SB13 in FIG. 19, the corresponding end telop is displayed. When the end telop is displayed according to the value of the advantageous period counter, the updated display of the net increase number is continued. The end telop is displayed until the number of games in the second advantageous period reaches the upper limit of 1500 and ends.

  When the value of the advantageous period counter reaches 0 and the first condition is satisfied and the second advantageous period ends, the game data in the second advantageous period is initialized, while SB45 in FIG. And since the process of SB46 is not performed, the production data from the first advantageous period is succeeded thereafter. In addition, after the second advantageous period is over, since the normal period is controlled, the navigation effect is not executed even if the push-bell wins. For this reason, the net increase number does not continuously increase as shown by the dotted line in FIG. 51, but decreases as the game progresses as shown by the solid line.

  In this way, when the net increase number during the advantageous period is subsequently taken over, the net increase number can be updated and displayed during the next advantageous period. Even in this case, the net increase number reaches, for example, “2370” so that the value obtained by adding the maximum payout number of one game to “2400” which is the upper limit value of the cumulative number as the net increase number is not displayed. In this case, the net increase number may be hidden, the net increase number may be hidden, and a special effect may be executed. Even after the net increase number reaches “2370”, the sub CPU 71 updates the net increase number according to the progress of the game. FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining an example of a special effect.

  When the net increase number reaches “2370”, as shown in FIG. 52A, the net increase number displayed in the upper right area of the liquid crystal display 27 is not displayed, and “Congratulations!” Such a message may be displayed. Further, when the net increase number reaches “3000”, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), a message such as “Congratulations!” May be displayed as a special effect. Other special effects may include a message such as “Great!”. Note that the sub CPU 71 performs a process of separately calculating the net increase number during the controlled AT during the currently controlled advantageous period, and when the special increase effect is executed without displaying the net increase number, the sub CPU 71 is currently controlled. Only the net increase in the AT during the advantageous period may be displayed.

-Example of reflecting in effects other than net increase number display In FIG. 51, the example of taking over the net increase number from the previous advantageous period and reflecting it in the net increase number in the next advantageous period has been described. For example, an effect corresponding to the inherited net increase number (hereinafter also referred to as a pure increase number effect) may be executed during the next advantageous period. FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining an example of a pure increase number corresponding effect.

  FIG. 53 shows an example of a display screen during an AT controlled in the next advantageous period in a state where “250” is taken over as the net increase in the previous advantageous period. As an effect corresponding to the net increase number, for example, an image of the mark ◎ is used, and the mark ◎ is displayed for the number of quotients obtained by dividing the succeeded net increase number by 100. In FIG. 53, since the quotient is 2 (= 250/100), two ◎ marks are displayed. That is, 100 sheets are displayed as one mark. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the rough estimate of the net increase in the previous advantageous period. As in FIG. 51, the net increase number inherited from the previous advantageous period is continuously updated in the normal period, etc., and the AT during the next advantageous period is ◎ according to the continuously increased net increase number. A mark may be displayed. In any case, the net increase in the number of ATs during the current advantageous period may be displayed separately from the ◎ mark, as shown in FIG. 53 as “TOTAL: 15”. Further, the display of the net increase number itself may be performed using such marks instead of specific numbers.

-Example of reflecting on the end screen of the advantageous period In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25 (h), FIG. 29 (d), etc., as the end screen when the advantageous period ends when the AT ends, An example of displaying game history information including the number of AT games and the net increase in the advantageous period has been described. However, the game history information displayed on the end screen is not limited to the game history during the current advantageous period. FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the end screen.

  When the controlled AT ends after the previous advantageous period ends until the game is consumed 100 times, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), << history result >> game history information during the previous advantageous period And the game history information during the current advantageous period may be displayed as << current result >>.

  Even when the end screen is displayed in this way, when the cumulative number reaches “2370” according to the progress of the game during each advantageous period, the net increase number is not displayed as described with reference to FIG. However, the end telop may be displayed, and the net increase number may not be displayed as the game history information on the end screen after the end telop is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent notification of more than the value obtained by adding the maximum payout number of one game to “2400” which is the upper limit value of the cumulative number as the net increase number (TOTAL).

  As another example of the end screen, when the game history during the current advantageous period or the game history obtained by adding up the game history during the previous advantageous period satisfies the specific condition, as shown in FIG. A special end screen that displays a message such as “Congratulations!” In the background of the rainbow mode may be displayed without notifying the detailed information of the history. The specific condition is, for example, a maximum of one game with respect to “2400” in which the net increase in the game history during the current advantageous period or the game history obtained by adding the game history during the previous advantageous period is the upper limit of the cumulative number. It is equal to or greater than the sum of the number of payouts, and the end telop during the advantageous period (including both the end telop displayed when the upper limit of the number of games is reached and the end telop displayed when the upper limit of the cumulative number is reached) It may include a condition that is established by the fact that is displayed, the story has been developed to the final story, and the like.

-Example of Reflecting on Game Screen during Mobile Linkage FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining an example of a game screen during mobile link. During mobile linkage, an effect corresponding to the net increase in the advantageous period may be executed. FIG. 55A shows an example of a screen after the net increase reaches “1000” and the OVER display is performed during the mobile link. After the OVER display is performed, a message such as “Acquire!” May be displayed in a pop-up below the net increase number display on the liquid crystal display 27.

  Further, during mobile linkage, effect data having a direct relationship with the number of medals paid out during the previous advantageous period may be taken over and reflected on the game screen. FIG. 55 (b) shows an example of a screen when the combined net increase number updated after the previous advantageous period reaches “2000” during the AT in the next advantageous period. Even if the net increase in the AT during the current advantageous period is relatively small at “120”, when the total net increase updated after the previous advantageous period reaches “2000”, the liquid crystal display 27 For example, a message such as “Acquire!” May be displayed in a pop-up display below the net increase number display.

(B) Modified example related to OVER display (a) About net increase number non-display period in net increase number calculation period In the above embodiment, a fixed screen is illustrated as a net increase number non-display period that is a net increase number calculation period but does not display a net increase number When the net increase number reaches “2000” on the confirmation screen and the bonus is started by winning the winning RBB, as shown in FIG. 28, the net increase number and the OVER display are displayed. In the above description, an example in which the net increase number and the OVER display are displayed in the rainbow mode when the net increase number has reached “2000” at the time of the first medal payout. Similarly, when the net increase number reaches “2000” in the net increase number non-display period, which is different from the display of the confirmation screen, and when the net increase number is controlled in the period for displaying the net increase number, the net increase number is set in the normal mode. After displaying once, the net increase number may be displayed in a rainbow manner when the net increase number reaches “2000” even when the first medal is paid out. For example, when the net increase number reaches “2000” in the CZ that does not display the net increase number, and when the AT is selected again and the AT is controlled during the CZ, the net increase number is temporarily displayed in the normal mode. After that, the net increase number and the OVER display may be displayed in a rainbow manner when the net increase number reaches “2000” even when the first medal is paid out. As a result, since the net increase number or the like is not suddenly displayed in a rainbow manner at the moment when the display of the net increase number is resumed, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that may cause the player to misunderstand or be confused. .

  In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which once the rainbow flag is set in SB20, the net increase number and the OVER display are displayed in a rainbow manner until the advantageous period ends, regardless of the subsequent net increase. However, in a game machine that is designed so that the game is performed for a relatively long time during the net increase number non-display period, after the net increase number display etc. is once displayed in the rainbow mode, the net increase number non-display period such as CZ is entered. In this case, it is expected that the net increase number is greatly reduced during the non-display period of the net increase number. In this case, when the display of the net increase number is resumed, the net increase number does not reach “2000” (for example, 1900). There are cases where In such a case, if the net increase number or the like is displayed in the rainbow mode as shown in the above embodiment, the net increase number display or the like is only displayed in the rainbow mode even though the net increase number does not reach “2000”. May cause the player's mood to be lost. In order to solve such a problem, for example, even when the net increase number once reaches “2000”, the net increase number in the progress of the subsequent game is a predetermined value within a predetermined range with respect to “2000” ( For example, when it becomes less than “1950”), the rainbow flag may be reset so that the net increase number display or the like is not performed in the rainbow mode until “2000” is reached again. Thus, for example, even after the net increase number reaches “2000” and is displayed in a rainbow manner, the net increase number decreases as the game progresses, and the net increase number is less than a predetermined value (“1950”). When this happens, the display of the net increase number and the like is performed in a normal manner, so that it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the player's mood is impaired. Even when the rainbow flag is reset, the OVER display number may be maintained without being reset, or the “2000” OVER display number may be reset. .

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the net increase number calculation period, the predetermined end condition is satisfied by the end of the advantageous period (including CZ and AT) after the ART is controlled and controlled by the advantageous RT and the ART is started. The period until it was established was illustrated. However, the net increase number calculation period is not limited to this as long as the payout rate includes a state where the payout rate exceeds 1. For example, the net increase number calculation period is predetermined when the advantageous period ends after winning the AT and starting the control to the AT. It may be a period until the end condition of is satisfied. Even if the payout rate does not exceed 1, it may be the period from when the AT win is announced until the advantageous period ends until the predetermined termination condition is satisfied, and advantageous after the AT start is announced. It may be a period until a predetermined end condition is satisfied when the period ends.

(B) Advantageous state and special state In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, the AT is exemplified as the advantageous state and the bonus is exemplified as the special state. However, the advantageous state and the special state are not limited to these, For example, it may be in a state that is advantageous to the player, such as RT with an increased probability of winning a re-gamer.

(C) Net increase number calculation period An example in which the start timing of the net increase number calculation period in the above embodiment is established by being controlled by ART. However, the start timing of the net increase number calculation period is not limited to this, and may be established, for example, by being controlled by a bonus, or by being controlled by either ART or bonus. It may be a thing. In addition, although the example in which the termination period of the net increase number calculation period is established when the advantageous period ends is shown, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be established when the bonus is not controlled by the AT, The game may be established when the AT ends (the number of AT games becomes 0), or when the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 30) after the advantageous period ends.

(D) Predetermined display mode and special display mode In the above embodiment, as the predetermined display mode, a normal mode mainly composed of a red character or the like common to each of the net increase number display, the OVER display, and the end screen is exemplified. However, if the predetermined display mode is a normal display mode, it is not necessary to be a common mode for each of the net increase number display, the OVER display, and the end screen, and different modes (for example, the net increase number display is a red character, OVER The display may be defined with pink characters, and the end screen may be defined with silver characters. In addition, as a special display mode, a rainbow mode mainly including characters having a common rainbow pattern in each of the net increase number display, the OVER display, and the end screen is illustrated. However, the special display mode may be a mode different from the predetermined display mode, and does not have to be a common mode in each of the net increase number display, the OVER display, and the end screen, and different modes (for example, the net increase number display has a rainbow pattern). ), OVER display may be floral characters, and the end screen may be gold characters. Thereby, the variation of each display mode of a pure increase number display, OVER display, and an end screen can be made rich.

  The special display mode is also used in other game effects that can be executed in accordance with the progress of the game, and the degree of advantage for the player than when the game effect is executed in other modes. It may be an aspect that is determined to be high. Here, as a game effect, there is an effect that notifies the possibility of winning an AT or bonus, and an example of a possibility notification effect that can be executed in any of a plurality of types of aspects including a rainbow aspect is illustrated. When the possibility notification effect is executed in the rainbow mode, it may be determined so that the possibility of winning the AT or the bonus is higher than when it is executed in the other mode. This makes it possible for the player to have a sense of anticipation and superiority when executed in a special display manner consistently regardless of the type of effect.

  Moreover, although one aspect of the rainbow aspect was illustrated as a special display aspect, it is not restricted to this, A plurality of types (for example, a rainbow aspect, a floral pattern aspect, an animal pattern aspect, etc.) may be defined. Further, it may be determined that the degree of advantage for the player differs depending on which of the plural types of special display modes is used for displaying the net increase number. The degree of advantage for the player is, for example, the level of a set value that has been set, or the number of AT games that have not been notified yet. For example, when the net increase number reaches “2000”, when the rainbow mode is displayed as the special display mode, a higher set value may be set than when the floral pattern mode is displayed as the special display mode. May be made higher. Thereby, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which special display mode the net increase number display is performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(E) End Screen In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26 (e) and the like, the end screen in the special display mode is not only a net increase in number but also other game results such as the number of AT games in the rainbow mode. The example displayed in is explained. However, on the end screen in the special display mode, only the net increase number may be displayed in the rainbow mode, and other game results may be displayed in the normal mode. The end screen may be displayed in a normal mode (see FIG. 25H) regardless of whether or not the rainbow flag is set.

(F) Specific number of special display modes In the above embodiment, the example in which the net increase number “2000” is determined as the specific number has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and “1500”, “2200”, etc. It may be determined. Further, although an example in which one value is determined as the specific number has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of values (1500, 2000, 2200) are determined, and the net increase number display reaches any net increase number. It may be determined that the degree of advantage for the player differs depending on whether the special display mode is set. For example, when the net increase number reaches “2200” and is displayed in a special display mode, a higher set value may be set than when it is displayed in a special display mode when it reaches “2000”. You may make it high property. Thereby, a player can be paid attention to the timing at which the net increase number is displayed in the special display mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(C) Modification regarding attention display In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, an ending effect is performed from the start of an advantageous final game to the start of the next game. The example in which the caution display is performed until a predetermined time elapses from the timing has been described. Also, if the operation for starting the next game is performed quickly, the ending effect will be terminated at that time, but the caution display will continue, so the caution display will be displayed across the next game. Can be done. However, the ending effect may be performed during the wait period (hereinafter also referred to as the ending weight period) by generating a weight for stopping the progress of the game. That is, during the ending effect, even if an operation for advancing the game is performed, the ending effect may be continued without being effectively received. Further, the ending wait period (5 seconds) is set longer than a predetermined time (3 seconds) for displaying the warning. Thereby, the caution display may be necessarily completed during the ending wait period. The suggestion display may be performed before or after the caution display as long as it is performed during a period other than the period during which the caution display is performed during the ending effect.

  In the above-described embodiments and modifications, examples have been described in which one type is determined as the background image according to the gaming state and the like. . For example, as an AT ending background for displaying a warning, a background image with the camera shutter closed and a background image with a treasure overflowing from the treasure chest are provided, and either of these is terminated. It may be displayed as an ending background for use. For example, the sub CPU 71 may determine which ending background is to be displayed according to the random number lottery according to the net increase in AT. Even when a plurality of types of backgrounds are defined, as shown in FIG. 32B, regardless of which background is displayed, a layer having a higher priority than the layer on which the background is displayed Anything may be used as long as it displays a warning. Thereby, even if any background is displayed, it is possible to prevent the caution display from being hindered by the background.

  The gaming machine in the above embodiment and the modification may further include the following configuration. The gaming machine executes a movable member effect that can be changed in a plurality of stages so that a movable member that can be changed between a position that overlaps the display area and a position that does not overlap the display area, and a region that overlaps the display area increases. A region where the movable member changes by a predetermined stage in the movable member effect does not overlap with a region where the caution image is displayed. The area where the movable member changes after the predetermined stage overlaps the area where the caution image can be displayed. According to this configuration, even when the caution image is displayed, the player can visually recognize the change in the movable member up to a predetermined stage in the movable member effect, so that the caution image is displayed without impairing the game performance. be able to. This will be specifically described below. For example, a movable member that can change between a position that overlaps the display area of the liquid crystal display 27 and a position that does not overlap at all is provided, and the sub CPU 71 has the movable member of the liquid crystal display 27 when a predetermined performance condition is satisfied. You may make it perform the movable member effect by drive-controlling a movable member so that the area | region which overlaps with a display area may increase over several steps (3 steps). The predetermined performance condition is satisfied, for example, when the “CH” combination is won in the first game after the advantageous state ends.

  Further, in the first stage of the movable member effect, for example, as in the case of the serif display, for example, the position changes to a position that overlaps only the area 1 shown in FIG. 32A, and in the second and subsequent stages, as shown in FIG. You may make it change to the position which overlaps with the area | region 2 where the caution display is performed. Even in this case, the movable member effect in the second stage and after is performed when the next game is started after the game in which the drive control in the first stage is performed, as in the case of the line display. . Thereby, even when the attention display is performed in the region 2 when the movable member effect is started, the first stage effect among the movable member effects can be executed, so that the gameability is impaired. It is possible to display warnings without any problems. Moreover, even if the first stage of the movable member effects is executed, the caution display can be prevented from being hindered. Note that the movable member may be, for example, a shutter member that is provided so as to surround the four sides of the display area of the liquid crystal display 27 and can be covered from each of the four sides. The accessory member may be provided so that the member drops onto the display area of the liquid crystal display 27.

  In the gaming machine in the above-described embodiment and modification, the display or operation after the second stage of the dialogue display or the movable member effect is finished, and after the game in which the first stage display or action is performed, the next game is performed. An example has been described in which the warning display, the serif display, and the movable member do not overlap each other by being executed at the start. However, the method for preventing the line display and the movable member from overlapping the area for displaying the caution display is not limited to this. For example, whether or not the caution display is performed by the sub CPU 71 (a predetermined time has not elapsed). When it is determined that the caution display is being performed, the display or operation in the second and subsequent stages of the dialogue display and the movable member effect is restricted / prohibited, and it is determined that the caution display is not performed. In addition, display or operation after the second stage of the line display or the movable member effect may be allowed. In addition, the execution time of the effect may be determined in advance, and in this case, the display or operation after the second stage may be determined to be executed after a predetermined time has elapsed. Specifically, the display or operation in the first stage can be executed until a predetermined time elapses after the caution display is performed, and the caution display is performed in the display or operation in the second stage or later. It may be executed after a predetermined time elapses. In addition, although the example in which the line display and the movable member effect are executed over a plurality of games has been described, the display or operation in the second stage or after may be performed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the caution display. For example, it may be executed within one game and ended.

  In the gaming machine in the embodiment and the modification described above, as an example of the display mode of the caution display, the display mode in which the message in the caution display is surrounded by a square frame is illustrated as shown in FIG. However, the display mode of the caution display is not limited to this. For example, the display mode of the caution display may be a mode in which the message in the caution display is surrounded by a square frame and the frame is blinked, or the message in the caution display is a conspicuous mode surrounded by a jagged frame. Alternatively, the message image of the caution display may be displayed in the area 2 and a large jagged frame enclosing the message image may be displayed on the entire display area. In this case, the jagged large frame and the message image of the caution display are continuous, and the display mode such as the color and shape of the continuous large jagged frame may be changed according to the advantage. Good. Thereby, the advantage can be suggested while paying attention to the attention display. Further, from the viewpoint of ensuring visibility, it is preferable that the color of the caution display is not the same color as the color of the background image.

  Further, the example in which the attention display layer is displayed in the layer having the highest priority among the plurality of layers has been described. However, if the priority display is a layer having a higher priority than the background image layer, the warning display may be displayed in a layer having a lower priority than a layer such as a navigation effect or a history display as a specific display. Even in this case, the caution display can be prevented from being hindered by the background. Further, in the relationship between the caution display and the specific display, as shown in FIG. 32B, since the areas used for display do not overlap, it is possible to prevent the caution display from being hindered by the specific display.

  In the gaming machine in the embodiment and the modification described above, the example in which the background image is an image including only an image corresponding to the gaming state has been described. However, the background image may include a caution display image. In addition, an example in which the caution display and the suggestion display are displayed using different areas as illustrated in FIG. 32 has been described. However, the caution display and the suggestion display are not performed simultaneously as shown in FIG. For this reason, the area used for the caution display may be used for the suggestion display. For example, the caution display may be displayed using the area 2, and the suggestion display may be displayed using the area 2. Even in this case, the caution display and the suggestion display are not performed at the same time. Therefore, the caution display is not hindered by the suggestion display, and the player can be prevented from being confused. In addition, if the suggestion display does not change the display mode of the suggestion display or the suggestion display is changed during the attention display, the suggestion display is continued while the suggestion display is continued. It may be a thing.

  Moreover, in the gaming machine in the above-described embodiment and the modification, the example in which the suggestion display is not performed or updated during the attention display by adjusting the execution timing and the layer has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is determined whether or not the caution display is being performed by the sub CPU 71. When the caution display is not being performed, the suggestion display is allowed to be performed or updated. May be restricted or prohibited from being newly performed or updated.

  In the gaming machine in the above embodiment and the modification, the example in which the caution display is displayed in the predetermined area 2 has been described. However, the caution display is not limited to this as long as the display position and the display mode are maintained from the start of display to the end, for example, depending on whether the bonus ends or the AT ends. The display mode of the caution display may be varied.

  In the gaming machine in the embodiment and the modification described above, the example in which the caution display is terminated after the caution display is performed until a predetermined time has elapsed has been described. However, the caution display may be continuously performed after a predetermined time has elapsed until a predetermined notification end condition is satisfied. The predetermined notification end condition is established, for example, by detecting an operation for starting the next game (detecting medal insertion, detecting an operation on a bet switch, detecting an operation on a start switch, etc.). May be. As a result, since the caution display can be continued even after the caution display is performed for a predetermined time, the effect of alerting can be increased.

  Moreover, in the gaming machine in the above-described embodiment and modification, the example in which the display mode of the caution display does not change from the display start to the end has been described. However, the display mode of the caution display may be changed when a predetermined change condition is satisfied. The predetermined change condition may be established, for example, by performing suggestion display.

  In the gaming machine in the above embodiment and the modification, the example in which the caution display is displayed using the layer having the highest priority has been described. However, the caution display is not limited to this as long as the display is performed using at least a layer having a higher priority than the background. For example, the error notification is performed during an error that makes it impossible to advance the game. Therefore, the error notification may be displayed using a layer having a higher priority than the caution display. Thereby, it can prevent that a caution display will be performed even in the state which cannot advance a game. When the error notification is performed during the caution display, for example, as described with reference to FIG. 34D, the caution display is temporarily stopped during the error notification (timing 8 ′ to 10 ′). The warning display may be resumed after the error notification ends. Further, the resumed caution display may be a display of the remaining time up to a predetermined time when the suspending operation is performed, or the caution display may be performed until a predetermined time (3 seconds) elapses from the restart point. Good. Further, when the error notification is performed, the caution display may be terminated, and the caution display may not be performed even after the error notification ends.

  In the gaming machine in the above-described embodiment and modification, the example in which the warning display is performed at the end of the advantageous state has been described. However, the caution display is not limited to this, and may be performed by not being controlled in an advantageous state for a predetermined period. Specifically, the warning display may be performed until a predetermined time elapses because the bonus or AT is not controlled even once 500 sheets are inserted. Further, the caution display may be performed when displaying a demonstration screen (also referred to as a customer waiting screen) that is executed when the game is not performed for a certain period of time.

  In the gaming machine in the above embodiment and the modified example, the example of displaying the net increase number in an advantageous state as the history display has been described, but not limited thereto, the number of AT games, the number of games added during the AT, etc. It may be displayed. Moreover, although the example which suggests a setting value as a suggestion display was demonstrated, not only this but what suggested the game mode etc. may be sufficient.

(D) Modification concerning addition In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the addition effect is regulated when it is determined YES in SB55 of FIG. 36 has been described. However, even if it is determined YES in SB55 in FIG. 36, when the number of remaining AT games exceeds the remaining upper limit number of games due to the addition this time, the remaining upper limit number of games is reached among the number of additional games this time You may make it perform the superimposition effect which alert | reports the number of games until it does. Thereby, the number of AT games can be notified to the player within the range of the upper limit number of advantageous periods.

  Further, the example in which the extra effect in the above-described embodiment is an effect of notifying the added game number specified from the added game number command has been described. However, the extra effect is not limited to this, and may be a notification of the number of games equal to or less than the extra game number specified from the extra game number command. For example, when the number of additional games specified from the additional game number command is “100”, the sub CPU 71 does not execute the additional effect, “10 game GET!”, “20 game GET!”, “50 game GET”. ! ”And“ 100 game GET! ”, And the added effect may be controlled based on the determination result. Thereby, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that it may actually be added more than the number of games notified by the extra effect.

  When configured in this way, the sub CPU 71, for example, even if the number of remaining AT games is equal to or greater than the remaining upper limit number of games, has already been informed to the player by an extra effect or the like. When the number of remaining AT games is not equal to or greater than the remaining upper limit number of games, an additional effect may be executed.

  In the slot machine 1 in the above embodiment, as the upper limit achievement specifying information, the remaining upper limit game number command that can specify the remaining upper limit game number up to the upper limit number of advantageous periods, and the remaining AT game number that can specify the remaining AT game number An example in which commands are output from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 has been described. However, the upper limit attainment specifying information is not limited to being constituted by a plurality of commands, and for example, may be constituted by one command for the remaining upper limit game number and the remaining AT game number.

  In the above embodiment, the AT is exemplified as the advantageous state, and the advantageous period is exemplified as the period that can be controlled to the advantageous state. However, the advantageous state and the period during which the advantageous state can be controlled are not limited thereto. For example, the advantageous state is an RT (a state where the advantageous degree is similar to the advantageous RT in the above embodiment) in which the winning probability of the re-gamer is improved as compared with the normal state. A period during which a winning combination (for example, a promotion such as promotion replay) can be controlled in a state that is subject to internal lottery (for example, a normal RT state that can be selected for promotion replay can be controlled) Period).

  Further, the advantageous state control period controlled to the advantageous state has been described as an example in which the number of AT games determined in the AT lottery and the extra lottery is consumed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined number of medals are paid out. It may be a period until the net increase number obtained by subtracting the medal used for setting the bet number from the paid-out medal reaches a predetermined number. It may be a period until the advantageous game is played a predetermined number of times. Moreover, although the upper limit value of the advantageous state controllable period has been described as an example of the number of games (1500 times) or the cumulative number (2400), it is not limited to this, and for example, the number of medals paid out (3000) It may be the number of games (1000 times) that is advantageous to the player such as AT games.

  The main CPU 61 in the embodiment has been described with respect to the example in which the lottery process is executed regardless of whether or not the remaining upper limit game number is reached before the remaining AT game number is consumed. However, the main CPU 61 includes a normal mode in which an extra lottery process is performed with a predetermined probability and a high probability mode in which an extra lottery is performed with a higher probability than the predetermined probability (a state in which the extra lottery is executed in an advantageous manner over the normal mode). Regardless of whether or not it is a situation where the remaining upper limit number of games is reached before the remaining number of AT games is consumed when the additional lottery is performed according to the controlled mode, In addition to the control, the lottery may be performed in accordance with the controlled mode. Specifically, with regard to the process for controlling the mode and the process for performing the extra lottery according to the mode, the remaining AT game number is not reached even when the remaining AT game number is consumed, and the remaining AT game number. May be executed in the same manner as when the remaining upper limit number of games is reached before consumption. As a result, there is no processing step for determining whether or not the remaining upper limit game number is reached before the remaining AT game number is consumed, so the processing load and storage capacity on the main CPU 61 side is increased. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by mode control without making it.

  On the other hand, in the case of displaying a background image according to the mode being controlled (for example, displaying a daytime background image in the normal mode, and displaying an evening background image in the high probability mode), control is performed as follows. You may make it do. For example, when the remaining upper limit number of games is not reached before the remaining number of AT games is consumed, the background image is controlled according to the controlled mode, while the remaining number of AT games is consumed. In a situation where the remaining upper limit number of games is reached, the background image may not be changed depending on the mode change (for example, the special background is maintained).

  In addition, whether or not the main CPU 61 reaches the remaining upper limit number of games before consuming the remaining number of AT games until at least the bonus is won after winning the bonus during the AT. Regardless, the addition lottery process may not be executed. Thereby, the player can be focused on winning the winning bonus without increasing the processing load on the main CPU 61 side.

  Further, the main CPU 61 wins a bonus (such as “RBB” in the above embodiment) in which the winning probability in the internal lottery is set to the same probability (no setting difference) regardless of the set value, and is controlled by the bonus. In this case, regardless of whether or not the remaining upper limit number of games is reached before the remaining number of AT games is consumed, an extra lottery process may be executed even during the bonus. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 consumes the number of remaining AT games when the winning probability in the internal lottery is won by a bonus determined at a different probability (with setting difference) and controlled by the bonus. Regardless of whether or not the remaining upper limit number of games has been reached by the time, the extra lottery process may not be executed during the bonus.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the sub CPU 71 in the above embodiment executes the extra effect depending on whether or not the remaining upper limit game number is reached before the remaining AT game number is consumed. An example of controlling whether to execute a special background has been described. However, the sub CPU 71 only needs to control a predetermined effect depending on whether or not the remaining upper limit game number is reached before the remaining AT game number is consumed. Depending on whether or not the remaining upper limit number of games is reached before consumption, the execution ratio of a predetermined effect (including an additional effect) may be varied. For example, in a gaming machine capable of executing a setting value suggesting effect that suggests the set setting value to the player, the sub CPU 71 does not reach the remaining upper limit game number before consuming the remaining AT game number. The setting value suggesting effect may be executed at a higher rate when the remaining upper limit number of games is reached before the remaining number of AT games is consumed. This makes it easier to execute the set value suggestion effect when the remaining upper limit number of games is reached before the remaining number of AT games is consumed, so the number of added games added internally is deleted. Can be supplemented. Further, when the end telop display is displayed and the AT is ended, or in the case of a special end screen as shown in FIG. 54B, the end telop display is not displayed and the AT is ended, or FIG. As shown in h), the set value suggesting effect is easier to be executed than in the case of the normal end screen, or a more advantageous setting value suggesting effect (the suggested value of setting value 5 or 6 is determined if the set value 2 or more It may be easier to execute (which can be said to be more advantageous than the suggestion effect). Further, the sub CPU 71 may control a predetermined effect regardless of whether or not the remaining upper limit game number is reached before the remaining AT game number is consumed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the added CPU number command, the remaining AT game number command, and the remaining upper limit game number command are output from the main CPU 61 when one game is completed has been described. However, the additional game number command, the remaining AT game number command, and the remaining upper limit game number command are not limited to this as long as they are output at a predetermined timing in one game. For example, the start switch 19 is operated to operate the reel It may be output at the timing when rotation starts.

(Other)
In the above embodiment, the determination switch 81a, the left selection switch 81b, the right selection switch 81c, the upper selection switch 81d, and the lower selection switch 81e are used as operation means for receiving operations in the administrator menu state and the player menu state. The production operation part 81 provided is illustrated. However, the operation means for accepting operations in the administrator menu state and the player menu state is not limited to this, and may be composed of two switches (a determination switch and a selection switch). Moreover, you may also use the operation means (for example, start switch 19, stop switch 21L-21R, etc.) used in progress of a game.

  In addition, on the manager menu screen or the player menu screen, guidance display for guiding the manager or the player which switch (operation means) should be operated may be performed. FIG. 56A is a diagram illustrating an example in which guidance display is performed in the lower left portion of the administrator menu screen. FIG. 56B is a diagram showing an example in which guidance display is performed in the lower left portion of the player menu screen. As the guidance display, as shown in each of FIGS. 56A and 56B, it is preferable to display an image imitating the effect operation unit 81 (hereinafter referred to as an operation unit simulated image). Also, which switch of the production operation unit 81 is a decision operation and which switch is a selection operation may be guided or highlighted to be highlighted. By doing so, it is possible to guide the administrator and the player which switch should be operated, and it is possible to prevent an unnecessary switch from being operated. The operation unit simulated image may be a common or similar image on both the administrator menu screen and the player menu screen. By using a common or similar image in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load and the amount of data, and to prevent misunderstanding that there may be a different production operation unit for the player or administrator. it can.

  In the above embodiment, when it is determined that an error has occurred in the error determination process on the sub CPU 71 side, an error notification is given regardless of whether the administrator menu screen or the player menu screen is displayed. A prioritized example has been described. However, during the inspection mode for verifying the operation check of the rendering device that is driven and controlled by the sub CPU 71, even when it is determined that an error has occurred in the error determination process on the sub CPU 71 side, an error notification is made. Instead, the display during the inspection mode may be continued. Thereby, it can prevent that a test | inspection is prevented by error alerting | reporting.

  In the above embodiment, “Navi Voice”, “Costume”, “Wallpaper” and the like are exemplified as game items. However, the game items are not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to these, for example, “volume adjustment” for adjusting the volume, “BGM selection” for selecting BGM, winning history or winning history of RBB or small role “Game history” or the like for displaying may be defined, and any item that can be confirmed or set by the player may be used.

  In the above-described embodiment, the “effect customization” of the game items has been described with respect to an example in which various settings can be made via the player menu screen. It may be possible to change and set without going through the user menu screen. For example, among the items that can be customized, the “wallpaper” item or the like can be selected by operating the left selection switch 81b and the right selection switch 81c while waiting for the game, or selecting the lower selection switch 81d and the lower selection without going through the player menu screen. It may be set by changing the operation of the switch 81e. FIG. 56 (c) is a diagram showing a display state of the liquid crystal display 27 in the game standby, and FIG. 56 (d) is a display state of the liquid crystal display 27 when the wallpaper is changed and set in the game standby. FIG. When the game is on standby (when a predetermined time has elapsed since the game was on standby), as shown in FIG. 56 (c), as described with reference to FIG. An image is displayed and a message such as “Change wallpaper with left and right buttons” is displayed. It is easier for the player to use the operation buttons used for customizing the presentation during the game standby as switches in other directions that are paired with one direction such as left and right. The left and right buttons are not limited to the up and down buttons. In addition, when the guidance display is performed, it is preferable to output a sound (hereinafter, a changeable effect) that can be specified as changeable, such as “You can change the wallpaper” as shown in a balloon in FIG. preferable. Accordingly, it is possible to notify the player that the wallpaper can be changed by operating the left and right buttons.

  When the left and right buttons are operated, the wallpaper image is changed and set as shown in FIG. The diagonal lines in FIG. 56 (d) indicate that the image is different from the wallpaper of FIG. 56 (c). Also, when the switch is operated to change various wallpaper, a sound that can specify that the change has been made, such as “the wallpaper has been changed” as shown in a balloon in FIG. ) Is more preferable. Thereby, the player can recognize that the change operation which is an operation for changing the wallpaper is reflected. Furthermore, the change specific effect may be performed every time the change operation is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the period from the time when one change operation is performed until a predetermined time elapses, a further change operation is temporarily performed. Even if it is done, the change specific effect is not performed, the change specific effect is performed again by the change operation after a certain period of time, and the change specific effect may not be performed even if the change operation is performed before the predetermined time elapses. . Thereby, the troublesomeness that a change specific operation is output for every change operation can be reduced. Note that the specific item may be customized by operating a predetermined button such as a left / right button, even when the guidance display is not performed, as long as the game is on standby. .

  In the above embodiment and the modification, the period in which the AT as an advantageous state can be controlled has been described as an example in which the number of AT games determined in the AT lottery and the extra lottery is consumed. For example, it may be a period until a predetermined number of medals are paid out, or may be a period until a net increase number obtained by subtracting a medal used for setting the betting number from the paid out medals reaches a predetermined number. It may be a period until a game that is advantageous to the player such as an AT game is performed a predetermined number of times.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the added CPU number command, the remaining AT game number command, and the remaining upper limit game number command are output from the main CPU 61 when one game is completed has been described. However, the additional game number command, the remaining AT game number command, and the remaining upper limit game number command are not limited to this as long as they are output at a predetermined timing in one game. For example, the start switch 19 is operated to operate the reel It may be output at the timing when rotation starts.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is turned on when the AT winning notification is performed has been described. However, the lighting start of the advantageous period notification lamp 80 is not limited to this as long as it is a predetermined timing during the advantageous period. For example, when the CZ is started or the so-called payout rate is 1 or more. Timing, the AT during the advantageous period, the timing at which the so-called appearance rate is controlled to be 1 or more, the first navigation effect is executed, the AT during the advantageous period, the so-called output rate is 1 or more It may be the timing when the first navigation effect is executed under the section and the medals larger than the bet amount are awarded.

  In the above embodiment, as the predetermined advantageous period transition condition, the predetermined CZ transition lottery condition, and the predetermined AT transition lottery condition, for example, a condition that is established by winning “one-player” or “bonus 1” or “bonus 2” winning However, for example, the advantageous period transition condition is a condition that is established by winning the “one-piece combination” and a condition that is established by winning the “bonus 1” or “bonus 2”, and the lottery for CZ transition In addition to these, the conditions and the AT transition lottery conditions include conditions that are established by winning the “normal lip”, and conditions that are established by winning any of “left correct answer bell 1” to “right correct answer bell 4”. Also good. In this case, the conditions established by winning the “normal lip”, or the conditions established by winning any of the “left correct answer bell 1” to “right correct answer bell 4”, It may be determined to control to CZ or AT with a lower probability than the probability of determining to control to CZ or AT by winning “Bonus 1” or “Bonus 2”.

  In the above embodiment, the AT is exemplified as the advantageous state, and the advantageous period is exemplified as the period that can be controlled to the advantageous state. However, the advantageous state and the period during which the advantageous state can be controlled are not limited thereto. For example, the advantageous state may be an additional specialization period in which the probability that the number of AT games will be added is improved, and the bonus state or RT in which the winning probability of the re-gamer is improved compared to the normal state (see above implementation) During the period that can be controlled to the advantageous state, a winning combination (for example, a role such as a promotion replay) that triggers the control of the RT is a target of internal lottery. (For example, a period during which control can be performed in a normal RT state in which promotion replay can be won).

  In addition, in the said embodiment and modification, push order bell was illustrated as a winning combination group used as the object which alert | reports an advantageous operation mode alerting | reporting image (navigation effect). However, the target of the advantageous operation mode notification image is not limited to this, for example, a winning combination group including an advantageous re-playing role that can be controlled to an advantageous RT with a high replay winning probability, and an advantageous re-playing role is obtained. A plurality of types of winning combination groups (so-called push order replay) with different operation modes (push order) to be awarded may be targeted. The target of the advantageous operation mode notification image is, for example, a winning combination group including a disadvantaged re-gamer that can be controlled to a disadvantaged RT with a low replay winning probability, and an operation for avoiding a disadvantageous re-gamer's winning. A plurality of types of winning combination groups (so-called push order replays) having different modes (push order) may be targeted.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the variable display unit 13 includes three left variable display columns 10L to right variable display column 10R will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A gaming machine including four or more variable display rows may be used. Moreover, although the variable display part 13 showed the example comprised by the reels 11L-11R, it is not restricted to this, You may comprise by display apparatuses, such as a liquid crystal display and 7 segment LED. Moreover, although the example in which only one pay line is set for the variable display unit 13 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of pay lines may be set.

  In addition, the gaming machine as a slot machine in the embodiment and the modification may have the following configuration.

  Preferably, in a gaming machine capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols by setting a predetermined number of game values as the number of bets for one game, and giving a game value according to the symbols when the variable display is stopped, Advantageous state control means for controlling to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and a gaming value set as a wager number from the assigned gaming value until the predetermined end condition is established after the advantageous state is controlled And a net multiplication display means for displaying the net multiplication calculated by the net multiplication calculation means in the advantageous state, and the net multiplication display means includes the net multiplication display means. The net increase is displayed in a predetermined display mode until the number reaches a specific number, and when the net increase reaches the specific number, the net increase is different from the predetermined display mode. Displayed in a display mode, the net increase to maintain the display in the special display mode even when it becomes less than the specific number in later.

  According to this configuration, the net increase calculated until the predetermined end condition is satisfied after being controlled to the advantageous state is displayed in the predetermined display mode until the net increase calculated reaches the specific number. When the net increase reaches a specific number, the net increase is displayed in a special display mode different from the predetermined display mode, and the display in the special display mode is maintained even when the net increase is less than the specific number thereafter. Is done. Thus, after the net increase reaches the specific number, the special display mode is displayed regardless of whether the net increase is less than the specific number. As a result, it is possible to grasp whether or not the specific number has been reached depending on whether or not the net increase is displayed in a special display mode, and it is assumed that the player has missed the notification that the net increase has reached the specific number. However, since the net increase is displayed in the special display mode, it is possible to grasp that the gaming machine is operating normally, and it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from being distrusted.

  Preferably, there is provided special state control means for controlling to a special state that is different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player, and the net multiplication calculating means is controlled until the predetermined termination condition is satisfied. The net increase is continuously calculated even during the special state, and the net increase display means displays the net increase even during the special state, and the net increase reaches the specific number during the special state. Sometimes the net increment is displayed in the special display mode different from the predetermined display mode, and the display in the special display mode is maintained even when the net increase is less than the specific number thereafter. To do.

  According to this configuration, the net increase is continuously calculated even during the special state, and when the net increase reaches a specific number, the net increase is displayed in a special display mode, and thereafter the net increase is not displayed. Even when it is less than the specific number, the display in the special display mode is maintained. As a result, in calculating and displaying the net increase, it is possible to have a relationship between the advantageous state and the special state, improve the interest of the game, and when the special state different from the advantageous state is controlled. In addition, it is possible to grasp whether or not the specific number has been reached based on whether or not the net increase is displayed in the special display mode, and the gaming machine is operating normally because the net increase is displayed in the special display mode. This can also be understood, and it is possible to prevent the distrust of the gaming machine.

  Preferably, the special state control means can be controlled to the special state in a special permissible period during which control to the special state is permitted, and the gaming machine is on the condition that it is in the special permissible period. A special permissible effect executing means for executing a special permissible effect indicating that it is in a special permissible period, and the net increase calculating means is configured to increase the net increase even during the special permissible period until the predetermined end condition is satisfied. The net increase display means interrupts the display of the net increase from the execution of the special permissible effect until the special state is controlled, and is controlled in the special state. When the net increase reaches the specific number from the execution of the special permissible effect until the special state is controlled, the special state is controlled. Is the number of the net increase displayed at the predetermined display mode from, the game value in subsequent displays in the special display mode the number net increase when it is granted.

  According to this configuration, the net increase is continuously calculated even during the special permissible period, while the display of the net increase is interrupted from when the special permissible effect is executed until the special state is controlled. Thereby, when the special permissible effect is being executed, the player can be concentrated on being controlled to the special state. In addition, when the net increase reaches a specific number from the execution of the special permissible effect until the special state is controlled, the game is performed after the net increase is displayed in a predetermined display mode after the special state is controlled. When the value is given, the net increment is displayed in a special display mode. Thereby, the net increase is not suddenly displayed in the special display mode at the moment of being controlled to the special state. As a result, it is possible to prevent a feeling that a special performance has been executed, and to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that may confuse the player.

  Preferably, the special state control means can be controlled to the special state in a special permissible period during which control to the special state is permitted, and the gaming machine is on the condition that it is in the special permissible period. A special permissible effect execution means for executing a special permissible effect indicating that it is in a special permissible period, and when the net increase reaches one of a predetermined number of stages, the fact that the number of stages has been reached A reaching effect display means for displaying a reaching effect, wherein the net increase calculating means continues to calculate the net increase even during the special permissible period until the predetermined end condition is satisfied, and The effect display means, even when the net increase has reached one of the plurality of types of stages determined, between the execution of the special allowable effect and the control of the special state. There are not displaying the arrival presentation, the game value in the after after being controlled to the special state to display the reaching effect when it is granted.

  According to this configuration, the net increase is continuously calculated even during the special permissible period, but the special permissible effect is executed even when the net increase reaches any one of a plurality of types of stages. The reaching effect is not displayed until the game is controlled to the special state, and the reaching effect is displayed when the game value is given after the control is performed to the special state. Accordingly, when the special permissible effect is being executed, the player can be concentrated on being controlled to the special state, and the arrival effect is not displayed suddenly at the moment when the special state is controlled. As a result, it is possible to prevent a feeling that a special performance has been executed, and to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that may confuse the player.

  Preferably, in a gaming machine that includes a display unit that variably displays a plurality of types of symbols, and that can be given a privilege according to the symbols when variable display is stopped, a plurality of layers that can display images are overlapped and displayed in a display area The image display means displays a predetermined image at the end of the advantageous state advantageous to the player in the predetermined layer of the plurality of layers, and the predetermined layer displays the predetermined image in the predetermined layer. When an image is displayed, a caution image that prompts the player to pay attention to excessive gaming in a layer having a higher priority than the predetermined layer is displayed until at least a predetermined time has elapsed, and a specific condition regarding the game is satisfied The specific image is displayed by the display area, and the specific image is displayed in the display area even after the predetermined time elapses when the specific condition is satisfied. Wherein an image note image is displayed in a region which does not overlap with the area to be displayed.

  According to this configuration, the attention image is displayed in a layer having a higher priority than the predetermined layer on which the predetermined image is displayed until at least the predetermined time has elapsed. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the attention image from being obstructed by the predetermined image. Further, the specific image is displayed until a predetermined time for displaying the attention image has elapsed, and the specific image is displayed in a region that does not overlap with the region where the attention image is displayed. For this reason, it is possible to display the specific image while preventing the attention image from being inhibited by the specific image. As a result, while the caution image is displayed, the player can fully view the caution function by visually recognizing the caution image, and at least information regarding the specific condition established by the specific image Can be reliably notified to a person or a store clerk.

  Preferably, the gaming machine includes advantageous state control means for controlling to the advantageous state, the specific condition includes a condition that is satisfied when the advantageous state ends, and the specific image is a game in the advantageous state. A history notification image for notifying information about the history is included.

  According to this configuration, since the player can visually recognize the history notification image even when the caution image is displayed, information regarding the game history can be reliably notified to the player.

  Preferably, the gaming machine includes an abnormality determining unit that determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, and the specific condition is established when the abnormality determining unit determines that an abnormality has occurred. The specific image includes an abnormality notification image for notifying that an abnormality has occurred.

  According to this configuration, since the player can visually recognize the abnormality notification image even when the caution image is displayed, it is possible to reliably notify that an abnormality has occurred.

  Preferably, the gaming machine includes a stop operation means for stopping the variable display, and a role lottery means for performing a role lottery for determining whether or not any of the plurality of roles is won, wherein the specific condition is The lottery result of the combination lottery includes a condition that is established when the lottery result becomes a specific lottery result having a different advantage for the player depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, and the specific image has a higher advantage for the player. An advantageous operation mode notification image for notifying the advantageous operation mode in an identifiable manner is included.

  According to this configuration, since the player can visually recognize the advantageous operation mode notification image even when the attention image is displayed, the advantageous operation mode can be reliably notified to the player.

  Preferably, the gaming machine includes effect control means for controlling execution of a plurality of types of effects including an update effect that updates the effect image over a plurality of stages, and the specific condition is that the update effect is executed. The specific image includes an effect image that is updated by a predetermined stage among the effect images that are updated in the update effect, and after the predetermined stage in the effect image that is updated in the update effect. The effect image that is updated is an image that is displayed in an area that overlaps the area where the attention image can be displayed.

  According to this configuration, even when the caution image is displayed, since the player can visually recognize the effect image that is updated by a predetermined stage among the update effects, the caution image is displayed without impairing the game performance. be able to.

  Preferably, after the image display means displays an image of a predetermined mode as the caution image, the display mode of the caution image is displayed until at least the predetermined time elapses regardless of whether or not the specific condition is satisfied. Maintain in the prescribed manner.

  According to this configuration, the display mode of the caution image can be maintained in a predetermined mode from the start to the end of the display of the caution image. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the caution image from being overlooked, as compared with the case where the display mode changes (such as the movement of the display position) in the middle.

  Preferably, the gaming machine includes a game operation accepting unit that accepts a game operation for advancing the game, and the image display unit accepts the game operation when the caution image is displayed. Even so, the display of the caution image is maintained at least until the predetermined period has elapsed.

  According to this configuration, even when a gaming operation is accepted while displaying a caution image, the display of the caution image is maintained until at least a predetermined time has elapsed. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the caution image from being overlooked as compared to the case where the display of the caution image is changed (such as the movement of the display position) by accepting the game operation.

  Preferably, the image display means is capable of displaying a special image different from the predetermined image in a predetermined layer of the plurality of layers, and has priority over the predetermined layer even when displaying the special image. The attention image is displayed in a higher layer until at least the predetermined time elapses.

  According to this configuration, even if a special image different from the predetermined image is displayed, the attention image is displayed in a layer having a higher priority than the predetermined layer until at least a predetermined time elapses. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the attention image from being obstructed by the special image.

  Preferably, in a gaming machine that includes display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and that can give a privilege according to a display result when variable display is stopped, the progress of the game is controlled and the progress of the game is A game control means for outputting information and an effect control means for controlling the effect based on the information, wherein the game control means determines an advantageous state control period that is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player. When the end condition for determining the advantageous state control period and the end condition for ending the determined advantageous state control period are satisfied, or when a special end condition different from the end condition is satisfied before the end condition is satisfied An advantageous state control means for ending the advantageous state, and the special end condition is that the advantageous state control possible period, which is a period in which the advantageous state can be controlled, reaches an upper limit value. The advantageous state control period determining means is capable of executing an additional control for adding an advantageous state control period when a predetermined additional condition is satisfied in the advantageous state, and before the advantageous state control period is consumed. Regardless of whether or not the special end condition is satisfied, the additional control is executed when the predetermined additional condition is satisfied, and the advantageous state control unit is configured to execute the additional condition when the special end condition is satisfied. , The remaining advantageous state control period is initialized regardless of the remaining advantageous state control period that has not been consumed.

  According to this configuration, on the game control means side, regardless of whether or not the special termination condition is satisfied before the advantageous state control period is consumed, the addition control is executed when the predetermined additional condition is satisfied. . Further, when the special end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state is ended, the remaining advantageous state control period is initialized regardless of the remaining advantageous state control period that has not been consumed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the gambling in the advantageous state from being excessively increased without increasing the processing load and the storage capacity on the game control means side.

  Preferably, the game control means is information for specifying an upper limit reaching that is information for enabling identification of whether or not the special termination condition is satisfied before the advantageous state control period is consumed, and Including specification information output means for outputting a plurality of types of specification information including information for addition specification for enabling the addition control to be performed during the advantageous state, An additional effect control means capable of executing an additional effect for notifying that the additional control has been executed when the additional specifying information is received during the advantageous state, wherein the additional effect control means includes the advantageous state control period; When the special end condition is satisfied by the time it is consumed based on the upper limit reaching specifying information, the additional specifying information is received. When you are there, to regulate the execution of the plus production.

  According to this configuration, the effect control means is in a state in which the special end condition is established before the advantageous state control period is consumed while executing the add-on effect when receiving the additional specifying information from the game control means side. Is specified based on the upper limit achievement specifying information, the execution of the extra effect is restricted. That is, when the period controlled to the advantageous state is actually extended, the additional effect is executed, and when the period controlled to the advantageous state is not actually extended, the additional effect is restricted. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the special end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends even if the advantageous state control period notified by the extra effect has not elapsed.

  Preferably, the upper limit achievement specifying information is information that can specify a remaining upper limit period until the advantageous state control possible period reaches an upper limit value and a remaining control period until the advantageous state control period is consumed. And the information output means for specifying outputs information capable of specifying the remaining upper limit period and the remaining control period in the game for each game as the upper limit reaching specifying information, and the remaining control period includes: In the game in which the upper limit achievement specifying information is output, when the extra control is executed, the extra period is included.

  According to this configuration, the remaining control period specified from the upper limit achievement specifying information output for each game includes the added period when the addition control is executed in the game. As a result, the production control means can determine whether or not the special end condition is satisfied before the advantageous state control period is consumed, including the added period. Can be determined.

  Preferably, a special state control means for controlling a special state that is different from the advantageous state and advantageous for a player is provided, and the advantageous state is controlled during the special state that is controlled before the advantageous state ends. While the control period does not elapse, the advantageous state controllable period elapses.

  According to this configuration, even if the special state is controlled before the advantageous state ends, the period during which the advantageous state is controlled is substantially shortened by controlling the special state, which is disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, since the advantageous state control period is not substantially extended, it is possible to prevent the euphoria from being excessively increased.

  Preferably, the gaming machine is capable of playing a game and is capable of granting a privilege according to the result of the game, and a first menu state capable of displaying game items for the player in the display area; And a presentation control means for controlling the display area according to the state, and controlling to any one of a plurality of states including a second menu state that can be displayed in the display area. Operating means for receiving an operation in each of the first menu state and the second menu state, and the effect control means is configured such that when a predetermined time elapses without the operation means being operated in the first menu state. The display in the first menu state is terminated, and the operation means is not operated in the second menu state, and a specific time shorter than the predetermined time has elapsed. It stops displaying in the second menu state when.

  According to such a configuration, when the operation means does not accept an operation in the second menu state, the timing for ending the display of the second menu state is when the operation means does not accept an operation in the first menu state. It is earlier than the timing to end the display of the first menu state. Thereby, compared with a 1st menu state, possibility that the player will see the 2nd menu state in which a management item can be displayed can be reduced. Conversely, even when the operation means does not accept an operation, the display in the first menu state can be displayed longer than the display in the second menu state. For this reason, it is possible to check the game items at a player's pace with a comparative margin. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the possibility that the player can see the second menu state in which the management items can be displayed, while allowing the display in the first menu state to be confirmed with a margin. .

  1 slot machine, 11L, 11M, 11R reel, 14L, 14M, 14R reel motor, 21L, 21M, 21R stop switch, 27 liquid crystal display, 63 main control board, 73 sub control board.

Claims (3)

There are a plurality of variable display columns that variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and by setting a predetermined number of game values as the number of bets for one game, variable display in each of the variable display columns can be started, and all the variable displays In a gaming machine that can be given gaming value according to the symbol combination when the line stops,
Gaming operation detection means for detecting a plurality of types of gaming operations;
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game in accordance with the game operation detected by the game operation detection means;
A production operation detecting means for detecting a production operation;
Effect control means for controlling the execution of a plurality of kinds of effects including a promotion effect that prompts the player to perform an operation for effect on the effect operation detecting means,
The plurality of types of gaming operations include a bet number operation for setting a bet number, a start operation for starting variable display in each of the plurality of variable display columns, and all of the plurality of variable display columns are variable. A first stop operation for stopping variable display in one variable display row in the display state, and the one variable display in a state in which only one variable display row is variably displayed among the plurality of variable display rows. A final stop operation to stop variable display in the column,
The production control means includes
At least one of a first period from when the start operation is detected until the first stop operation is detected and a second period after the final stop operation is detected until the bet number operation is detected In one period, the promotion effect starts.
In the third period from the detection of the betting number operation to the detection of the start operation and the fourth period from the detection of the first stop operation to the detection of the final stop operation, the promotion effect der those that do not start with is,
The production control means is provided with the identifiable production and the privilege that can specify whether or not a privilege advantageous for a player is provided by detecting the operation for the production along with the promotion production. Including an operation corresponding effect execution means for executing any one of a plurality of types of effects including an unidentifiable effect that cannot be specified whether or not,
The ratio at which the identifiable effect is executed by the operation corresponding effect execution means is determined to be higher in the second period than in the first period,
A gaming machine in which the ratio at which the unspecified performance is executed by the operation-corresponding effect execution means is determined to be higher in the first period than in the second period . There are a plurality of variable display columns that variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and by setting a predetermined number of game values as the number of bets for one game, variable display in each of the variable display columns can be started, and all the variable displays In a gaming machine that can be given gaming value according to the symbol combination when the line stops,
Gaming operation detection means for detecting a plurality of types of gaming operations;
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game in accordance with the game operation detected by the game operation detection means;
A production operation detecting means for detecting a production operation;
Effect control means for controlling the execution of a plurality of kinds of effects including a promotion effect that prompts the player to perform an operation for effect on the effect operation detecting means,
The plurality of types of gaming operations include a bet number operation for setting a bet number, a start operation for starting variable display in each of the plurality of variable display columns, and all of the plurality of variable display columns are variable. A first stop operation for stopping variable display in one variable display row in the display state, and the one variable display in a state in which only one variable display row is variably displayed among the plurality of variable display rows. A final stop operation to stop variable display in the column,
The production control means includes
At least one of a first period from when the start operation is detected until the first stop operation is detected and a second period after the final stop operation is detected until the bet number operation is detected In one period, the promotion effect starts.
In the third period from the detection of the betting number operation to the detection of the start operation and the fourth period from the detection of the first stop operation to the detection of the final stop operation, the promotion effect der those that do not start with is,
The promotion effect includes a first pattern that executes an unidentifiable effect that cannot be specified as to whether or not a privilege advantageous to the player is given by detecting the effect operation, and the effect operation includes And a second pattern that executes a identifiable effect that can specify whether or not a privilege advantageous to the player is given by being detected,
A gaming machine in which the rate at which the promotion effect by the first pattern is started in the first period is determined to be higher than the rate at which the promotion effect by the second pattern is started in the second period . There are a plurality of variable display columns that variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and by setting a predetermined number of game values as the number of bets for one game, variable display in each of the variable display columns can be started, and all the variable displays In a gaming machine that can be given gaming value according to the symbol combination when the line stops,
Gaming operation detection means for detecting a plurality of types of gaming operations;
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game in accordance with the game operation detected by the game operation detection means;
A production operation detecting means for detecting a production operation;
Effect control means for controlling the execution of a plurality of kinds of effects including a promotion effect that prompts the player to perform an operation for effect on the effect operation detecting means,
The plurality of types of gaming operations include a bet number operation for setting a bet number, a start operation for starting variable display in each of the plurality of variable display columns, and all of the plurality of variable display columns are variable. A first stop operation for stopping variable display in one variable display row in the display state, and the one variable display in a state in which only one variable display row is variably displayed among the plurality of variable display rows. A final stop operation to stop variable display in the column,
The production control means includes
At least one of a first period from when the start operation is detected until the first stop operation is detected and a second period after the final stop operation is detected until the bet number operation is detected In one period, the promotion effect starts.
In the third period from the detection of the betting number operation to the detection of the start operation and the fourth period from the detection of the first stop operation to the detection of the final stop operation, the promotion effect der those that do not start with is,
The production control means executes the promotion production in any of a plurality of types including a predetermined mode and a special mode, and the promotion production in the special mode is the second period. A gaming machine that starts at a higher rate than when it is one period, and starts with a higher rate for the promotion effect in the predetermined mode than when it is the first period .